JP2020032132A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine resistant to an illegal act on a movable member that causes a game ball to flow into a specific area.SOLUTION: A game machine having a specific area into which a game ball can flow in a special game state generated when a result of a game becomes a special result includes: detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has passed an area where the game ball can flow in the special game state that is different from the specific area; and a movable member operable in the right-left direction of the game machine and disposed upstream of the specific area and the detection means. The game ball can flow into the specific area by operating the movable member in one direction in the right-left direction, and the game ball can flow into the detection means by operating the movable member in the other direction in the right-left direction.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 76

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a variable winning device having a specific area and a movable member operable upstream of the specific area are provided, and a game ball is identified by operating the movable member at a specific timing in a special game state. A gaming machine capable of flowing into an area is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  Generally, the movable member as disclosed in Patent Document 1 operates in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine.

JP, 2018-064604, A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, when vibration or impact is applied from the front of the gaming machine when the movable member operates, there is a possibility that the movable member is displaced at an unintended timing and the game ball flows into a specific area. Was.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to cheating on a movable member that operates to cause a game ball to flow into a specific area.

  In a representative embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine having a specific area into which a game ball can flow in a special game state generated when a result of a game is a special result, an area in which the special game state can flow. And a detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball has passed in an area different from the specific area, and operable in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and disposed upstream of the specific area and the detecting means. A movable member, wherein the movable member operates in one direction in the left-right direction so that the game ball can flow into the specific area, and the movable member operates in the other direction in the left-right direction. Game balls can flow into the detecting means.

  According to an embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to cheating on a movable member that operates to cause a game ball to flow into a specific area.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from diagonally right upper. It is the front view which looked at the gaming machine from the front. It is the left view which looked at the gaming machine from the left. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3A is a perspective view of the lower plate unit as viewed obliquely from the upper right, and FIG. FIG. 3A is a top view of the lower plate unit, FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the glass frame except the decoration device (top unit). Front view (a) of glass frame excluding decoration device (top unit), cross-sectional view taken along line AA (b), front view (c), back view (d) of glass frame excluding speaker decoration member It is. FIG. 2A is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a sound output unit, and FIG. 2B is a diagram illustrating how a sound output from an upper speaker is transmitted. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the gaming machine as viewed obliquely from the right. FIG. 3A is a side view of a speaker decoration member attached to a gaming machine, and FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the speaker decoration member viewed from diagonally upper left. It is the front view (a) of a speaker decoration member, and the perspective view (b) which looked at the speaker decoration member from diagonally right. It is a partially enlarged front view of a front frame. It is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of a ball launching device, and a perspective view (c) of a cutting blade. It is the front view (a) and exploded perspective view (b) of a foul ball catching unit. It is the back view (a) of a foul ball catch unit, and a perspective view (b) of the back side. It is the sectional view (a) of a horizontal direction (AA line) of a foul ball catch unit, and the sectional view (b) of a horizontal direction of a parts member. It is the perspective view which looked at the foul ball catch unit from diagonally above. It is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame from which the foul ball catching unit was removed. It is the perspective view (a) of the upper plate unit in the state where the effect button unit was removed from the upper plate unit main body, and the top view (b) of the upper plate unit. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper plate unit (upper plate unit main body). It is an exploded perspective view of a production button unit (production button). It is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of an effect button unit (effect button). FIG. 3A is a plan view of the effect button unit (effect button) as viewed from above, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the operation panel with the effect button unit and the right button installation portion removed. A front view (a) of the upper plate unit, a cross-sectional view (b) of a cross section taken along line AA in the front view (a), and an enlarged view of a main part of the cross-sectional view (b). (C). Sectional view (a) of a top view of the upper plate unit (similar to FIG. 18 (b)) as viewed from the back along the line AA, and a front view of a state in which a part of members constituting the upper plate unit is removed. (B). A sectional view (a) of a cross section taken along line AA of a top view (similar to FIG. 18 (b)) of the upper plate unit, and a main part enlarged view (b) of a main part of the cross sectional view (a) enlarged. ). A right-side enlarged view (a) showing the right side of a section of the effect button unit and its surroundings cut along the diametric direction, and a left-side enlarged view (b) showing the left side enlarged, and buttons. It is a top view (c) and (d) which show the principal part of a base. It is a front view explaining an outlet. It is the back view (a) and sectional top view (b) of an outer unit (or front frame). FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of an outer unit (or a front frame). It is a disassembled perspective view of a spherical flow path unit. It is the back view (a) and see-through front view (b) of a spherical channel unit base. It is a right side view (a) of the glass frame and a partially enlarged view (b) thereof, and a perspective view (c) viewed obliquely from below the glass frame and a partially enlarged view thereof (d). FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view in which a projecting effect unit (decorative device) is separated from a glass frame, and FIG. It is a front view of a projection effect unit. It is a front view (normal game state) of the game board of the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view (state which suggests a specific mode) of a game board of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view (specific game state) of the game board of the game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38A is a schematic diagram illustrating a lighting mode of the accessory lamp. FIG. 38A illustrates a lighting mode in which a lighting portion circulates when fluctuating, and FIG. 38B illustrates a lighting mode in which two lighting states are alternately repeated when fluctuating. FIG. 38C shows a lighting mode in which the lighting portion changes so as to draw a figure 8 at the time of fluctuation. FIG. 39 (a) is a schematic diagram of a general winning opening unit and a collective display device, FIG. 39 (b) is a detailed view of the collective display device, and FIG. 39 (c) is a sticker for decorating the general winning opening unit. FIG. 39D shows a schematic diagram of position information and a schematic diagram of related information displayed on a sticker, respectively. It is a figure explaining operation of a role item unit and a falling role unit, a display mode on a display device, etc., FIG. 40 (a-1) shows an example in the case of a normal game state, and FIG. FIG. 40 (b-1) shows an example of a case where the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (a-1), and FIG. 40 (b-1) shows an example of a case where a specific mode is suggested. FIG. 40 (c-2) shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (b-1), and FIG. 40 (c-1) shows an example in the case of the specific game state. ) Shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (c-1). It is an exploded perspective view of a movable role. It is a detailed disassembled perspective view of a movable role. It is an exploded view of the urging member unit which comprises a movable accessory main body. FIG. 44A is a perspective view showing the operation of the lower movable portion that guides the movement of the movable accessory main body. FIG. 44A shows a case where the urging member is in an initial state, and FIG. 44B shows a case where the urging member is extended. Are shown below. It is a front view (initial position) of a movable role main part. FIG. 46 is a rear view of FIG. 45. It is a front view (intermediate position) of a movable part main part. FIG. 48 is a rear view of FIG. 47. It is a front view (maximum position) of a movable character main part. FIG. 50 is a rear view of FIG. 49. It is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the sub-board box which stores the effect control device. It is a front view of a box upper member to which a cover member is attached. 53 (enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a rectangular dashed line in FIG. 53), where FIG. 54 (a) is a view without a cover member, and FIG. 54 (b) is a view with the cover member attached. FIG. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 53, showing a case where a cover member is attached, and a detailed view thereof. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 53, showing a case where a cover member is attached, and a detailed view thereof. It is a perspective view of a cover member. It is a rear view showing the mounting surface of the cover member. It is a front view of a cover member. It is a left view of a cover member. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIGS. 58 and 59. 63 (a) is a front view and FIG. 63 (b) is a back view showing a cutting region of a first cutting portion of the cover member. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view and FIG. 64 (b) is a rear view showing a cutting region of a second cutting portion (and a first cutting portion) of the cover member. FIG. 65 (a) shows a step of attaching a fastening screw, and FIG. 65 (b) shows a state before attaching the cover member. FIG. 66 (c) shows a state in which the cover member is being attached to the upper box member, and FIG. 66 (d) shows a state in which the cover member has been attached to the upper box member. FIG. 67 (a) shows a step of cutting a cut portion, and FIG. 67 (b) shows a step of removing a fastening screw. FIG. 68 (c) shows a state in which the cover member is being removed from the upper box member, and FIG. 68 (d) shows a state in which the cover member has been removed from the upper box member. It is sectional drawing of the 1st modification of a cover member. FIG. 70 (a) is a front view, and FIG. 70 (b) is a rear view, showing a second modification of the cover member. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board and the like of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a big winning opening unit. FIG. 73A is a perspective view showing the operation of the large-aperture opening portion drive mechanism of the large-award winning opening unit, and FIG. 73A (a) shows an initial state, and FIG. . 73B is a plan view of the movable portion driving mechanism of the special winning opening unit. FIG. 73B (a) shows a state where the remaining ball switch can win (initial state), and FIG. 73B (b) shows a state where the V switch can win. It is a front view of a big winning opening unit, and is a figure showing a V switch winning prohibition state. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 74. It is a front view of a big winning opening unit, and is a figure showing a V switch winning possible state. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 76. It is a front view (specific game state) of the game board of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the example of composition of the game control system of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 game process (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 game process (the latter half). FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a usual process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a procedure of an ordinary process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table which illustrates a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a fall probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process (first half) during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process (the latter half) during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows a reception command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation effect setting process.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction as viewed from the player playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIGS. 1, 2, and 3 are diagrams illustrating a gaming machine. 1, 2, and 3 are a perspective view, a front view, and a left side view of the gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame which is attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be freely opened and closed via hinges 16a and 16b. The opening / closing frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15 (front frame unit). The frame 11 and the front frame 12 form an outer frame unit 17.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 35) is provided on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front face of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 35) formed on the game board 30 can be viewed. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14. The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds the transparent member.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by rotating and opening only the glass frame 15 via the hinges 12a and 12b (FIG. 4). In addition, by rotating the front frame 12 through the hinges 16a and 16b to open the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device 100 (main board) disposed on the back side of the game board 30 is opened. ) (See FIG. 79). The glass frame 15 and / or the front frame 12 are locked or opened by a key 446.

  In the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7) of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit), a front frame inner member 482 that is entirely concave when viewed from the front is disposed in front of the edge of the cover glass 14. I have. The front frame inner member 482 includes a bottom plate 482a extending in the left-right direction, and two right and left vertical plates 482b, 482c extending vertically from both ends of the bottom plate 482a. The vertical plates 482b and 482c face the front (the player side) on the lower side, but are twisted at the center, and face the center of the gaming machine 10 on the upper side (FIG. 33 (a) also). reference).

  The front frame inner member 482 has black as a color with low brightness and low saturation. For this reason, there is a black part in the field of view when the player pays attention to the display device 41 (described later) and various winning holes (described later) of the game board 30 via the cover glass 14 (transparent member). Sense of oppression to the player is reduced. Note that if the front frame inner member 482 is a color with high saturation or lightness such as red, the player will give a noticeable and sharp impression to the player. In addition, around the outer side of the front frame inner member 482, there are light emitting devices such as the decoration devices 18b and 18c and the effect button 25. These light emitting devices are clearly different from the black front frame inner member 482 in appearance. Because it is partitioned, its light emission is conspicuous. The material of the front frame inner member 482 may be black or the front surface may be painted black.

  In addition, various frame components are disposed in an edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

  Decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c capable of emitting light in accordance with a game state are provided at the upper center, right side, and left side of the glass frame 15. The decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c are lighting devices that house lighting members such as LEDs therein and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorating devices 18a, 18b, 18c constitute a part of the frame decorating device 18 (see FIG. 80).

  The decoration device 18a is a top unit that extends in the left-right direction of the gaming machine 10 above the glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. The decoration device 18a is fixed and does not operate in the present embodiment, but protrudes forward only when necessary from the retracted initial position (normal position) or moves vertically in order to reduce the feeling of pressure on the player. The moving operation may be performed.

  The decoration device 18b is a projecting effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decoration device 18c is a projecting effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically and protrudes forward on the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorating devices 18b and 18c irradiate the player with light toward the center side (inside) of the gaming machine 10 and, at the same time, from the plurality of openings 795a of the side cover 795 via the inner lens 794 (inner cover). Light leaks out of the room. The detailed configurations of the decoration devices 18b and 18c will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Upper speakers 19a and 19b are provided at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from the upper speakers 19a and 19b, two lower speakers 19c and 19d are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19c and 19d are arranged at the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speakers 19a, 19b and the lower speakers 19c, 19d emit sound effects, warning sounds, notification sounds, and the like. The upper speakers 19a and 19b are covered with a right speaker decoration member 470a and a left speaker decoration member 470b, respectively. The detailed functions and configurations of the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b are shown in FIGS. It will be described later based on

  An upper plate unit 20 having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to a lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape opened at the upper part. Like the front frame inner member 482, the upper plate 21 also has black as a color with low brightness and low saturation. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device 530 (described later) one by one. The detailed configuration of the upper plate unit 20 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The upper plate unit 20 further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball rental operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. Prepare.

  The effect operation device is an operation device including an effect button 25, volume control buttons 690d and 690e, and a cross key 690f. The effect operation device is provided on the upper center of the upper plate unit 20 and on the left side thereof so that the player can easily operate the effect operation device. ing. The effect button 25 is arranged in the opening of the operation panel 690 so as to be surrounded by the operation panel 690. The operation panel 690 can reflect light by, for example, metal plating on the surface or making the entire surface made of metal, and has, for example, silver (silver) metallic luster. When the effect button 25 emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is reflected on the surrounding operation panel 690, and the light emitting effect of the effect button 25 becomes effective.

  As described later, in the effect button 25, the button lens 754 on the uppermost surface is transparent, and the character “PUSH” of the button lens decoration 756 arranged below the button lens 754 can be visually recognized (FIG. 18). The effect button 25 has a vibration function such that it is vibrated by a motor 771 as a driving means (FIG. 18). Note that the effect button 25 may operate so as to fly upward. In this case, when viewed from the front in front, the effect button 25 partially overlaps the black front frame inner member 482 (bottom plate 482a) of the front frame base unit 480. However, the player notices that the portion that appears black has changed, and does not miss the change (operation) of the effect button 25. The effect button 25 has a different color (for example, silver) from the front frame inner member 482 (the bottom plate 482a) or emits light when jumping out, so that the effect (operation) of the effect button 25 is not overlooked.

  The volume control buttons 690d and 690e are provided on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the upper plate unit 20, and adjust the volume of the speaker by increasing or decreasing (+-). The cross key 690f is provided on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the upper plate unit 20 and adjacent to the volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e, and adjusts, for example, the brightness of the LED.

  The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 690 of the upper plate unit 20. The ball lending operation device includes a balance display section 690a, a ball lending button 690b, and a return button 690c. The balance display section 690a is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed. The ball lending button 690b is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 690c is used for discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These buttons are operated by the player.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED therein, and performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in the upper plate unit 20. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 80).

  Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit 20 and the like, and below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball firing device 530, and a lower plate capable of storing game balls And a lower plate unit 29 provided with 23 and the like. The lower plate unit 29 and the upper plate unit 20 conform to each other in shape and are arranged side by side in a vertical direction. By operating the upper plate operation section 735 of the upper plate unit 20, the game balls of the upper plate 21 can flow down to the lower plate 23. The detailed configuration of the lower plate unit 29 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19c on the right. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device 530 shoots the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball fired from the ball firing device 530 is set so as to increase as the rotation amount of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball firing device 530 can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) at which game balls are fired into the game area 32, in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and various firing modes having different firing forces. Can fire game balls. The firing modes include left-handed (normal hit) in which a game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 of the lower plate unit 29 is disposed below the upper plate unit 20 at a predetermined interval from the upper plate unit 20. The lower plate 23 has an opening 455a (described later) penetrating the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 467 for opening and closing the opening 455a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation section 467 to open the opening 455a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the opening 455a.

  Also, on the back side of the front frame 12, a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices, an upper tank 448 for storing game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed in the island facility, and an upper tank 448 are provided. A payout unit 780 for paying out the flowing game balls to the upper plate 21 and the like are arranged (FIG. 3).

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the present embodiment, the decoration device 18a (top unit) protrudes forward slightly larger than the upper plate unit 20 or the like, and stands out from the decoration devices 18b and 18c (projection effect unit) and the lower plate unit. It protrudes significantly more forward than 29 (see dash-dot line). That is, the amount of protrusion of the decorating device 18a forward is slightly larger than that of the upper plate unit 20 or the like, and is considerably larger than that of the decorating devices 18b and 18c or the lower plate unit 29. Here, the protruding amount is a distance from a rear portion (for example, the cover glass 14) of the glass frame 15 to a front end 432a (apex) in the front-rear direction. However, the present invention is not limited to FIG. 3, and the amount of protrusion of the decoration device 18a forward can be appropriately changed. For example, in order to prevent the player's head from colliding with the decorating device 18a (top unit), the projecting amount of the decorating device 18a is made smaller than that of the upper plate unit 20 (to be larger than the decorating devices 18b and 18c), and the decorating is performed. The front end 432a (apex) of the device 18a may be arranged behind the front end 20a (apex) of the upper plate unit 20.

  FIG. 4 is an exploded view of the gaming machine. A part of the game board 30 is omitted for easy viewing.

  The decoration device 18 a (top unit) includes a main body 432, a transparent cover 434 located in front of the main body 432, a decoration part 436 protruding left and right from a front part of the main body 432, and left and right parts located behind the decoration part 436. The light-emitting unit 440 includes a light-emitting unit 440 (light-emitting unit) and mounting portions 438 and 442 located behind the main body 432. The decoration device 18a has a divergent shape that spreads upward, downward, left, and right in order to make the player look large and wide. The decoration device 18a is attached to the front frame base unit 480 by an attachment portion 442 connected to the receiving portion 444 of the front frame base unit 480.

  Between the front surface 432b of the main body 432 and the transparent cover 434, a sheet on which the model name of the gaming machine 10 is displayed is sandwiched and arranged. By replacing only the sheet, the decoration device 18a can be used even with a different model without replacing the entire decoration device 18a, and the cost can be reduced.

  A ball launching device 530 for launching a game ball and a foul ball catching unit 560 (a foul ball capture member) for capturing a foul ball (described below) are arranged below the front frame 12. Details of the ball firing device 530 will be described later with reference to FIGS. The foul ball catching unit 560 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12, 14 to 17.

  At the left end of the front frame 12, a plurality of game board locking members 12c for locking the locked portions 30d (see FIG. 35) of the game board 30 are provided. The game board 30 is attached to the front frame 4 via the locked portion 30d and the game board locking member 12c. A receiving portion 451 that is connected to the engaging portion 452 of the lower plate unit 29 is provided at the right end of the front frame 12.

  On the lower left side of the front frame 12, there is provided a prize ball payout port 443 for passing a prize ball paid out from the payout unit 780 to a prize ball inlet 484 of the upper plate 21.

[Lower plate unit]
A detailed configuration of the lower plate unit 29 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 shows a perspective view (a) of the lower plate unit 29 viewed obliquely from the upper right and a perspective view (b) viewed obliquely from the upper left. FIG. 6 shows a top view (a), a sectional view (b), and enlarged sectional views (c) and (d) of the lower plate unit 29.

  The lower plate unit 29 includes a lower plate base 453 on the rear side, a left case portion 456, a central case portion 458, and a right case portion 460 connected to the lower plate base 453 from the front. Further, the lower plate unit 29 includes a lower case portion 459 which is connected to the lower plate base 453 from the front below the left case portion 456.

  Further, the lower plate unit 29 includes a call button 454 for calling a clerk of a game arcade (game store) in front of the left case portion 456. The ON signal of the call button 454 is input to the game control device 100 (FIG. 79), sent to the data lamp from the external information terminal 71 as external information, and the data lamp as a display device for game information and the like emits light.

  A right decoration 466a for decorating the right front side of the lower plate unit 29 is provided in front of the central case portion 458. In front of the lower plate 23, a left decorative portion 466a for decorating the left front side of the lower plate unit 29 is provided.

  The central case portion 458 has a vertical portion 458a extending substantially vertically and a horizontal portion 458b extending substantially horizontally. The lower speaker 19c and the shaft portion 24a of the operation handle 24 are arranged between the vertical portion 458a of the central case portion 458 and the right case portion 460.

  The lower plate unit 29 is roughly divided into a flat portion 29a extending in the left-right direction and a right protruding portion 29b protruding upward on the right side of the flat portion 29a. The flat portion 29a includes the lower plate 23, the left case portion 456, and the horizontal portion 458b of the central case portion 458. Above the flat portion 29a, a bottom plate portion 701 (described later) of the upper plate unit 20 is arranged to face. The right protruding portion 29b includes a vertical portion 458a of the central case portion 458, a right case portion 460, the lower speaker 19c, and the operation handle 24. The right protruding portion 29b has a shape that fits from the rear to the right end of the upper plate unit 20 and the lower right corner of the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7) so that the glass frame 15 can be closed with respect to the front frame 12. have.

  Between the left case part 456 and the central case part 458, a passage 462 (groove) for a game ball is formed. At the upper end of the passage 462, a cover 464, which is a transparent member that covers the passage 462 from above, is provided. Since the cover 464 is transparent, the inside of the passage 462 becomes visible when the glass frame 15 is opened to the front frame 12.

  On the back surface of the lower plate base 453 of the lower plate unit 29, a first entrance 461 and a second entrance 465 of the game ball are provided. Into the first entrance 461, a foul ball (falling ball) that has been launched from the ball firing device 530 but has returned without reaching the game area 32 flows in from the foul ball catching unit 560, and the upper plate 21 has When the tank is full, game balls (prize balls) from the payout unit 780 may flow in. The game ball pulled out of the upper plate 21 by the operation of the upper plate operation unit 735 may flow into the second inlet 465. The game balls pass through the passage 462 from the first entrance 461 and the second entrance 465, and flow into the lower plate 23 from the exit 463 of the passage 462. When the lower plate 23 is full, game balls are stored in the passage 462. The passage 462 may partially pass through the inside or below the left case part 456 and the central case part 458 in order to communicate with the first inlet 461 and the second inlet 465.

  Since the foul ball passes through the passage 462 from the first entrance 461, a foul ball having one end of a thread attached thereto as a part of fraud (going) (the other end of the thread is attached to a game ball in the game area 32). Is used, the transparent cover 464 of the passage 462 is rubbed with a thread and damaged and becomes white and non-transparent, so that illegality can be easily found. Further, the transparent cover 464 can be replaced even if it is damaged by fraud, and there is no need to replace the entire lower plate unit 29.

  In front of the left case part 456 and above the lower case part 459, a plate part 455 constituting the bottom part and the front part of the lower plate 23 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 6B, the dish portion 455 has an L-shaped cross section in the up-down direction and in the front-rear direction. The left case portion 456 has an upper plate 456a and a front plate 456b that are integrally formed, and the front plate 456b forms a back plate of the lower plate 23. As shown in FIG. 6B, the front plate 456 b (the back plate of the lower plate 23) of the left case portion 456 has such an inclination that the lower the lower plate, the lower the plate. It becomes easy to scrape the game balls of the lower plate 23 from the front by hand.

  An annular opening 455a and a valley 455b radially extending in four directions from the opening 455a are provided at the bottom of the lower plate 23 (that is, at the bottom of the plate 455). The game ball that has flowed into the lower plate 23 from the exit 463 of the passage 462 passes through the trough 455b, which is easy to pass, and falls into the opening 455a. The opening 455a is normally closed by the opening / closing member 457, but the opening / closing member 457 is opened by the operation of the opening / closing operation section 467. When the opening / closing member 457 is opened, the game ball passes through the opening 455a and is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 10 from an annular discharge port 459a protruding from the lower case portion 459.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, the depth D1 of the depression (recess) of the lower plate 23 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball. For this reason, it becomes easy to grasp the game ball by hand. The depth D1 corresponds to the height from the lower end of the opening 455a (the upper surface of the closed opening / closing member 457) to the lower end of the outlet 463 of the passage 462. Further, the depth D2 of the annular outlet 459a is longer than the diameter of the game ball. For this reason, the game ball that has passed through the opening 455a easily falls directly below.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6 (d), the depth D3 of the discharge portion (discharge hole) composed of the discharge port 459a and the opening 455a is longer than the diameter of the game ball, but is larger than twice the diameter of the game ball. short. For this reason, when the lower half side of the game ball is caught by the opening / closing member 457 (door) of the discharging unit (when it returns to the lower side), it is easy to return to the lower side, and the upper half side of the game ball is the opening / closing member 457 of the discharging unit. When the game balls are caught in the game machine (they are ejected out of the gaming machine), the game balls are guided straight to a box (a collection box for automatic counting or a so-called dollar box), so that they do not spill out of the box. Note that the depth D3 corresponds to a height from the lower end of the outlet 459a to the upper end of the opening 455a.

(Sound output section)
The configuration of the sound output unit 473 for outputting sound will be described with reference to FIGS. The sound output unit 473 includes upper speakers 19a and 19b as sound generating means, and speaker decoration members 470a and 470b as peripheral members of the upper speakers 19a and 19b. FIG. 7 is an exploded view of the glass frame 15 excluding the decoration device 18a (top unit). FIG. 8 is a front view (a) and a cross-sectional view (b) of the glass frame 15 excluding the decoration device 18a, and further a front view (c) and a rear view (d) excluding the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b. FIG. 9 is an enlarged cross-sectional view (a) of the sound output unit and a view (b) showing how the sound output from the upper speakers 19a and 19b is transmitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the front frame base unit 480 of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit) includes upper speakers 19a and 19b. The upper speakers 19a and 19b are inclined so that sound is output toward the lower side and the inner side (center side) of the gaming machine 10. The upper plate unit 20 and the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b are attached to the front frame base unit 480. The right speaker decoration member 470a is attached to the front frame base unit 480 so as to cover the right upper speaker 19a. The left speaker decoration member 470b is attached to the front frame base unit 480 so as to cover the left upper speaker 19b.

  The speaker decoration members 470a and 470b prevent sounds from the upper speakers 19a and 19b from being directly transmitted to the player. Sounds emitted from the front portions of the upper speakers 19a and 19b are reflected on the back surfaces of the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b, respectively, hit the cover glass 14 and are reflected again there and transmitted to the player (solid line in FIG. 9B). ). Note that the sound from the lower speakers 19c and 19d is transmitted directly to the player. The speaker decoration members 470a and 470b constitute first sound reflecting means, and the cover glass 14 constitutes second sound reflecting means.

  The upper speaker 19a (or upper speaker 19b) includes a speaker body 490, a first speaker housing member 491a behind the speaker body 490, and a second speaker located around the speaker body 490 and connected to the first speaker housing member 491a. This is a speaker unit including a housing member 491b and a speaker outer frame member 491c arranged around the second speaker housing member 491b.

  The first speaker housing member 491a and the second speaker housing member 491b are combined to surround and house the speaker body 490 except for the front part of the speaker body 490. A space 492 (gap) is formed between the rear part of the speaker main body 490 and the first speaker housing member 491a. A box-shaped space 493 (gap) is formed between the lower part of the first speaker housing member 491a constituting the back surface of the upper speakers 19a and 19b (speaker unit) and the cover glass 14. The length L1 of the space 493 in the front-rear direction, that is, the distance between the lower part of the first speaker housing member 491a and the cover glass 14, is determined by playing the sound from the rear part (the back of the speaker unit) of the upper speakers 19a and 19b with the cover glass 14. The value is set to an appropriate value so that the light can be reflected toward the person (dotted line in FIG. 9B).

  As shown by a solid line and a dotted line in FIG. 9B, sounds emitted from the front and rear portions of the upper speakers 19a and 19b are reflected by the cover glass 14 and directed toward the player, so that various effects are produced. For example, in the case of a high sound, the ear hurts when the player hits directly with the sound, but it is alleviated through the cover glass 14 (wall). Further, it is preferable that sound (particularly low sound) hits the cover glass 14 so that sound is heard from the entire cover glass 14. In addition, the sound hardly leaks out, and the player can easily hear the sound.

  As shown in FIG. 8D, the front frame base unit 480 has a rear cover member 488a on the right side and a rear cover member on the left side at positions corresponding to the rear (rear side) of the upper speakers 19a and 19b on the rear surface. 488b. The back cover members 488a and 488b have a box-like shape. The right back cover member 488a can attenuate the sound (vibration) transmitted from the upper speaker 19a to the rear (back side) via the front frame base unit 480 by confining the sound (vibration) in the internal space. Similarly, the left back cover member 488b can attenuate the sound (vibration) transmitted from the upper speaker 19b to the rear (back side) via the front frame base unit 480 by confining it in the internal space and attenuating it. Therefore, the back cover members 488a and 488b have an effect of preventing noise and can protect various electronic circuit boards around the upper speakers 19a and 19b from vibration.

  In addition, the rear side cover members 488a and 488b can place the electric wiring on the outside (opposite side of the cover glass 14) to keep the electric wiring away from the cover glass 14 so that the cover glass 14 (including the frame 14a) can be moved forward. The frame base unit 480 is easily detached from the mounting portion 480a. In at least one of the back cover members 488 a and 488 b, a portion along the cover glass 14 conforms in shape to a member (for example, the guide rail 31) of the game board 30, and the glass frame 15 is moved relative to the front frame 12. Acts as a guide when closing. Further, the back cover members 488a and 488b may be made to function as spacers by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction to prevent the game board 30 from contacting the cover glass 14. In this case, the game board 30 may have a portion that comes into contact with the back cover members 488a and 488b.

  The front frame base unit 480 will be further described below. The front frame base unit 480 includes a frame 14a of the cover glass 14, the above-described front frame inner member 482 disposed in front of the frame 14a, Is provided. Further, the front frame base unit 480 includes a prize ball inlet 484 for allowing the prize balls paid out from the payout unit 780 to flow into the upper plate 21, and a launch ball supply path 486 for supplying game balls from the upper plate 21 to the ball launching device 530. And. In addition, the front frame base unit 480 lowers the curved inward end 480c, which is formally adapted to the right protruding portion 29b of the lower plate unit 29, so that the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12. Prepared on the side.

  The prize ball entrance 484 (FIG. 7) communicates with a prize ball passage 487 (FIG. 8D) on the back side of the front frame base unit 480. The prize ball passage 487 is connected to the prize ball payout port 443 (FIG. 4) of the front frame 12. For this reason, the prize ball from the payout unit 780 passes through the prize ball payout exit 443 (FIG. 4), the prize ball passage 487 (FIG. 8 (d)), and the prize ball entrance 484 (FIG. 7) to the upper plate 21. Inflow.

  In a normal case where the upper plate operation unit 735 is not operated, the opening / closing member 734 (FIGS. 18 and 19) is in the closed state, and the game ball is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the shooting ball supply path 486. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 734 is opened by the operation of the upper plate operation section 735, the game ball flows not in the launch ball supply path 486 but in a downward path 485, and the second entrance 465 communicating with the path 485. Reach As a result, the game ball is pulled from the upper plate 21 to the lower plate 23.

  The front frame base unit 480 has a ball stopping unit 489 as shown in FIG. The ball stopping unit 489 is for stopping game balls from flowing down from the launching ball supply path 486 to the rear of the front frame base unit 480 when the glass frame 15 is opened from the front frame 12. In the ball stopping unit 489, a substantially L-shaped ball stopping member 483 capable of opening and closing the firing ball supply path 486 is rotatably mounted on the front frame base unit 480. Note that the ball stopping unit 489 may be the same as a conventional one (for example, see JP-A-2012-232200).

  The ball stopper 483 is urged by an urging member (not shown) such as a coil spring so that the firing sphere supply path 486 is closed. Then, when the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12, the ball stopping member 483 engages with a ball stopping member converting portion 536 (see FIGS. 4 and 13) protruding from the front surface of the ball firing device 530. By doing so, the launch sphere supply path 486 is opened. In addition, the front end surface of the ball stopping member conversion unit 536 is inclined so as to have a trapezoidal cam surface for sliding the ball stopping member 483 in contact.

[Speaker decoration member]
The configuration of the speaker decoration members 470a and 470b will be described with reference to FIGS. 10, 11A and 11B. In FIGS. 10, 11A, and 11B, only the speaker decoration member 470a is illustrated, but the speaker decoration member 470a and the speaker decoration member 470b have the same configuration if left and right are switched.

  FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 as viewed obliquely from the right. FIG. 11A is a side view (a) of the speaker decoration member 470a attached to the gaming machine 10, and a perspective view (b) of the speaker decoration member 470a viewed from diagonally upper left. FIG. 11B is a front view (a) of the speaker decoration member 470a and a perspective view (b) of the speaker decoration member 470a viewed obliquely from the right.

  The speaker decoration member 470 a (470 b) has outer mounting portions 514 a and 514 b screwed to the side of the front frame base unit 480, and the inner mounting portion screwed to the front frame base unit 480 on the inner mounting plate 512. 516. The speaker decoration member 470a (470b) includes an opening 518 through which the attachment portion 438 of the decoration device 18a (top unit) penetrates.

  The speaker decoration member 470a (470b) includes the diffusion unit 502 as a light diffusion unit that diffuses light, and includes the upper reflection unit 504 and the lower reflection unit 506 as light reflection units that reflect light. The diffusion section 502 is arranged adjacent to an inner mounting plate 512 arranged inside (center side) of the gaming machine 10. The upper reflecting section 504 is arranged on the lower right side of the diffusing section 502 and in contact with the diffusing section 502. The upper reflecting section 504 and the diffusing section 502 may be substantially in the same plane. The lower reflector 506 is arranged below the upper reflector 504. The diffusion portion 502, the upper reflection portion 504, and the lower reflection portion 506 have metal surfaces plated (particularly, the front surface) or have metal surface portions (surface plates).

  The diffusion unit 502 is disposed behind the light emitting unit 440 of the decoration device 18a with the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) and the decoration device 18a (top unit) attached to the gaming machine 10 (front frame base unit 480). You. The diffusion unit 502 may be disposed in contact with the back (rear) of the transparent case of the light emitting unit 440. In addition, the diffusing unit 502 is provided on a ground glass surface on which irregularities of various sizes are randomly arranged, and diffuses and diffuses light emitted backward from the light emitting unit 440 by irregular reflection. Accordingly, even when the LEDs are arranged in a point light source inside the light emitting unit 440, the light emitting unit 440 can be made to emit light as a whole. The light irregularly reflected by the diffusing unit 502 is directed forward or toward the upper reflecting unit 504 or the lower reflecting unit 506. The light emitting unit 440 of the decoration device 18a emits light, so that it is possible to appeal to a player who is viewed from the side of the gaming machine 10 (the entrance direction of the gaming island).

  The upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506 can reflect light from the light emitting portion 440, and have a blade-like shape as a whole. The upper reflector 504 has a front surface 504a and side surfaces 504b. The lower reflector 506 has a front surface 506a and side surfaces 506b. The thickness of the upper reflector 504 and the lower reflector 506 may increase toward the outside of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. 11B (a), the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting portion 504 has a washing plate shape, and a plurality of ridges 504c projecting forward are arranged side by side. Similarly, the front surface 506a of the lower reflection part 506 is also in the shape of a washing plate, and a plurality of protrusions 506c protruding forward are arranged side by side. Each of the protrusions 504c and 506c extends substantially in the vertical direction.

  The overall inclination (angle) of the front surfaces 504a and 506a with respect to the vertical direction or the horizontal direction can be adjusted as appropriate. For example, as shown in the side view of FIG. 11A (a), the front surface 504a of the upper reflector 504 is arranged substantially parallel to the up-down direction and the left-right direction so as to face forward, while the front surface 506a of the lower reflector 506 is vertically moved. You may be greatly inclined from the direction. Since the lower reflecting portion 506 is farther from the light emitting portion 440 than the upper reflecting portion 504, in this way, the direction of the reflected light from the front surface 506a can be prevented from being too low, and the lower reflecting portion 506 The light from the light emitting unit 440 reflected by both the upper reflecting unit 504 can be concentrated on a predetermined position (for example, the player's head). In addition, the front surface 440a of the case of the diffusion unit 502 and the light emitting unit 440 faces the front in alignment with the front surface 504a of the upper reflection unit 504, so that the diffusion unit 502, the light emission unit 440, and the upper reflection unit 504 There is coordination in the luminous effect, and the interest is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 11B (a), the cross section (perpendicular to the longitudinal direction) of the plurality of ridges 504c and 506c is like a saw tooth. Each protruding ridge 504c, 506c has a triangular (or L-shaped) cross section protruding forward, and has a reflecting surface 522 on which light from the light emitting unit 440 of the decoration device 18a hits, and a light emitting unit 440. A non-reflective surface 524 (shadowed portion) that is not irradiated with light is provided in front. The presence of the reflective surface 522 and the non-reflective surface 524 allows the front surfaces 504a and 506a to look like stripes from the front, with only the reflective surface 522 shining, thereby increasing the effect of the effect and enhancing interest.

  Further, by adjusting the width of the reflecting surface 522, the amount of light reflected from the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting portion 504 or the front surface 506a of the lower reflecting portion 506 can be adjusted. For example, since the distance from the lower reflector 506 to the light emitting unit 440 is farther than the distance to the upper reflector 504, the protrusions 506c are used as the protrusions 504c so that the amount of reflected light is equalized between the upper reflector 504 and the lower reflector 506. It may have a reflective surface 522 having a greater width.

  Further, although the reflecting surface 522 is inclined downward toward the center (inside) of the gaming machine 10, the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting portion 504 or the front surface 504a of the upper reflecting portion 504 can be adjusted by adjusting the inclination (angle) of the reflecting surface 522 from the left-right direction. The amount of light reflected from the front surface 506a of the lower reflector 506 can be adjusted. For example, since the lower reflecting portion 506 is farther from the light emitting portion 440 than the upper reflecting portion 504, the reflecting surface 522 of the ridge 506c is formed so that the amount of reflected light is equalized between the upper reflecting portion 504 and the lower reflecting portion 506. Alternatively, the inclination (angle) from the left and right directions of the projection 504c may be smaller than that of the reflection surface 522. If the inclination of the reflection surface 522 of the ridge 506c is reduced (that is, the height of the protrusion 506c is reduced), the area of the non-reflection surface 524 (shadow portion) is reduced, so that the reflected light of the front surface 506a is reduced. Light amount increases.

  Further, with reference to FIGS. 10, 11A and 11B, the speaker decoration member 470a (470b) includes a first decoration portion 508 facing the upper reflection portion 504 outside and behind the upper reflection portion 504, A second decoration portion 509 disposed between the upper reflection portion 504 and the lower reflection portion 506; a third decoration portion 510 facing the lower reflection portion 506 on the side rear side of the lower reflection portion 506; And a fourth decorative portion 511 (omitted in FIG. 11B) facing the third decorative portion 510 on the lower side. Further, on the speaker decoration member 470 a (470 b), two lower decorative portions 520 a and 520 b having a thin blade shape are arranged below the lower reflecting portion 506 so as to form a step. The light from the light emitting unit 440 of the decoration device 18a is blocked by the lower reflection unit 506 and the upper reflection unit 504, and hardly reaches the decoration units 508 to 511, 520a, and 520b, and the front surface 504a of the upper reflection unit 504 or The reflected light from the front surface 506a of the lower reflector 506 becomes conspicuous.

  The first decorative portion 508 and the third decorative portion 510 have a metallic luster due to metal plating on the surface or a metal surface portion (surface plate), but the second decorative portion 509 and the fourth decorative portion 511 are provided. Is made of a resin having a black color (a color with low lightness or saturation), does not reflect light, and has no metallic luster. Therefore, the metallic luster of the first decorative portion 508 and the third decorative portion 510 becomes conspicuous, and the decorativeness is improved.

(Ball launcher)
The details of the sphere launching device 530 (launch unit, sphere launching means) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 12 is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame 12 having the ball launching device 530. FIG. 13 is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of the ball launching device 530, and a perspective view (c) of the cutting blade 550.

  The game ball hit by the launching punch 532 of the ball launching device 530 usually receives a foul ball catching unit 560 (foul) from a firing rail 533 formed at the lower part of the front frame 12 so as to be inclined upward from lower right to upper left. It jumps over the ball catching member), flows into the launching ball guide passage 33 of the game board 30, and is guided to the game area 32 (see FIG. 35) through the launching ball guide passage 33.

  As shown by the solid arrow and the dotted arrow in the lower right direction in FIG. 12, game balls (fire balls) having a small firing force (fire speed) return from the fire ball guide passage 33 without reaching the game area 32. Then, it becomes a foul ball (falling ball) and flows into the foul ball catching unit 560. In particular, the foul ball (falling ball) collides with the projection 585 which is a ball stopper of the foul ball catch unit 560, and flows into the foul ball catch unit 560. A game ball (firing ball) having a lower firing force (firing speed) becomes a foul ball (direct ball) that jumps directly into the foul ball catching unit 560 without reaching the firing ball guide passage 33. As described above, the foul ball catching unit 560 constitutes a capture unit that captures a foul ball that has been fired but does not enter the game area 32. The details of the configuration of the foul ball catching unit 560 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a ball launching device 530 for launching a game ball includes a guiding path 542 communicating with a launch ball supply path 486 for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 21. A cutting mechanism 544 for cutting the thread member of the illegal ball when the illegal ball to which the thread member is attached is fired.

  A game ball (illegal ball) to which a line member such as a fishing line is attached is fired by the ball firing device 530, and when the game ball enters the game area 32 (see FIG. 35), the line member is operated from the upper plate 21. In some cases, a fraudulent action (goto action) is performed to make a winning in the winning opening, and the cutting mechanism 544 cuts the thread member of the illegal ball. The cutting mechanism 544 constitutes first fraud countermeasure means (first fraud countermeasure unit).

  In the closed state of the glass frame 15, the guide path 542 on the front frame 12 side and the shooting sphere supply path 486 on the glass frame 15 side are connected and communicate with each other, and become a part of the supply flow path 540. The supply flow path 540 is configured to guide the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 to the right and left in the left and right direction and then to the rear in the front and rear direction to supply the game balls to the firing position of the ball firing device 530.

  The ball launching device 530 includes a base plate 531 installed at the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 12 and a launching punch 532 rotatably disposed on the front surface of the base plate 531. On the front surface of the base plate 531, a firing rail 533 (a firing path) that is inclined upward from right to left is fixed.

  The launching punch 532 is configured to rotate based on a rotating operation of the operation handle 24, and to bounce a game ball at a firing position on the firing rail 533. The game ball hit by the launching punch 532 is guided to the left and right in the left-right direction by the firing rail 533, flows into the launching ball guide passage 33 of the game board 30 from the launching rail 533, passes through the launching ball guide passage 33, and plays. It is led to 32.

  The firing speed of the game ball fired from the ball firing device 530 is set so as to increase as the turning amount of the operation handle 24 increases.

  The entrance 542a of the guideway 542 is provided on a cover member 534 attached to the base plate 531 so as to cover the front of the base plate 531 of the ball launching device 530. The inlet 542a is formed as an opening that penetrates the cover member 534 in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the guide path 542 is provided with a cutting mechanism 544 for cutting the thread member of the illegal ball.

  The cutting mechanism 544 includes a yarn guiding portion 546 formed on the cover member 534 so as to be connected to the entrance portion 542a of the guiding path 542, and a cutting blade attached to the cover member 534 so that the cutting edge portion is located within the yarn guiding portion 546. 550, and a fixing plate 548 for fixing the cutting blade 550 to the cover member 534.

  The yarn guiding portion 546 is an opening that penetrates the cover member 534 in the front-rear direction, and is cut out so as to be connected to an upper portion on the left side of the entrance 542a of the guiding path 542. The yarn guiding section 546 and the inlet section 542a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The yarn guiding portion 546 is configured as a guiding passage that enables the yarn member of the illegal ball to move toward the cutting edge portion (predetermined position) of the cutting blade 550 when the illegal ball is fired.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, the cutting blade 550 has a flat base end 553 and a flat first end connected to the base end 553 and extending in the same plane as the base end 553. 551, and a flat second end portion 552 connected to the base end portion 553 and bent rearward from the base end portion 553. The first distal end portion 551 and the second distal end portion 552 are vertically arranged side by side, and a gap 554 formed between (boundary) between the distal end portions 551 and 552 serves as a cutting portion for cutting a thread member of an illegal ball. Become. The distal end surface 551a (right side surface) of the first distal end portion 551 and the distal end surface 552a (right side surface) of the second distal end portion 552 descend toward the gap 554 so as to guide the thread member of the illegal ball into the gap 554. It is formed as an inclined surface.

  The cutting blade 550 is fixed to the cover member 534 via the fixing plate 548 in a state where the cutting blade 550 is accommodated in the accommodation concave portion 534a formed on the back surface of the cover member 534. The cutting blade 550 is fixed in the accommodation recess 534a by a fixing plate 548 that engages with the cover member 534. The fixing plate 548 is provided on the rear side of the cutting blade 550 fitted in the housing recess 534a.

  The accommodation recess 534a is formed in the cover member 534 so as to have a shape such that the cutting blade 550 is fitted therein. The housing recess 534a is a recess formed so as to follow the outer shape of the cutting blade 550. When the cutting blade 550 is fitted into the housing recess 534a, the movement of the cutting blade 550 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is restricted. . When the cutting blade 550 is installed in the accommodation recess 534a, the cutting edge of the cutting blade 550, such as the gap 554, is located at a position deeper than the thread guiding portion 546 (position to the left).

  In this manner, the cutting blade 550 is disposed such that the cutting edge is directed to the right side and is exposed to the yarn guiding portion 546 (see FIG. 13A).

  In the cutting mechanism 544 configured as described above, when an illegal ball to which the thread member is attached is fired by the ball launching device 530, the thread member of the illegal ball is cut by the cutting blade 550 via the thread guiding portion 546. And cut into the gap 554 of the cutting blade 550. The thread member that has cut into the gap 554 is pulled and cut by the firing force of the illegal ball. The yarn guiding portion 546 of the cutting mechanism 544 is cut out at a side portion of the inlet portion 542a so as to be connected to the inlet portion 542a of the guiding path 542 of the supply flow path 540, and the cutting blade 550 is recessed in the yarn guiding portion 546. Since it is arranged at the position, the thread member of the illegal ball can be cut without hindering the flow of the game ball.

  The supply flow path 540 guides the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 to the right side and then to the rear, and supplies the game balls to the firing position of the ball firing device 530. The firing rail 533 fires from the firing position. It is configured to guide the played game ball to the left side. The yarn guiding section 546 is formed so as to be connected to the left side of the inlet section 542a of the guiding path 542, and the cutting blade 550 is disposed so that the cutting edge thereof faces right. Thus, by providing the thread guiding portion 546 on the side of the entrance portion 542a on the game ball launch direction side and providing the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 550 in the direction opposite to the game ball launch direction, the thread member of the illegal ball can be further twisted. It is possible to reliably cut.

(Foul ball catch unit)
The details of the foul ball catching unit 560 capable of catching foul balls will be described with reference to FIGS. A foul ball is a game ball fired by the ball firing device 530 but not entering the game area 32. FIG. 14A is a front view (a) and an exploded view (b) of the foul ball catching unit 560. FIG. 14B is a back view (a) of the foul ball catching unit 560 and a perspective view (b) of the back side. FIG. 15 is a horizontal sectional view of the foul ball catching unit 560 (a) and a horizontal sectional view of the part member 560b (b). The upper view of FIG. 15A is the same as FIG. 14B (a). FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the foul ball catching unit 560 viewed obliquely from above. FIG. 17 is a partially enlarged front view of the front frame 12 with the foul ball catching unit 560 removed.

  The foul ball catching unit 560 is a combination of a base member 560a and a part member 560b that is connected to the back side of the base member 560a from behind. The base member 560a is installed on the front frame 12 to form various game ball flow paths 590 (590a to 590d) in contact with the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12. Further, an inter-base-part flow path 591 is formed between the base member 560a and the parts member 560b. The foul ball catching unit 560 includes a main body 569 having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a dropped-out ball collection unit 570 located on the left side of the main body 569. When the glass frame 15 is in the open state, the falling-out payout ball collecting section 570 collects game balls flowing out from the winning ball payout opening 443 (FIGS. 4 and 12) and falling downward.

  First, the base member 560a will be described. The base member 560a includes a flat front portion 561 (front plate), a flat rolling portion 564 (rolling plate) vertically provided rearward above the front portion 561, and a central lower portion of the front portion 561. And a base-side box portion 565 provided at the rear. The front part 561 is provided with three windows 561a for viewing the rear. The window portion 561a also has a function of preventing static electricity from staying. The base side box portion 565 has an opening in the front portion 561 at the front. The upper end surface 594 of the base-side box portion 565 is an inclined surface on which the game ball can roll to the left.

  Further, the base member 560a is adjacent to the opening of the base-side box portion 565, and is a base-side reinforcing rib 566, which is an annular enclosure vertically provided in the front right lower portion of the front portion 561, and the base portion 561 with respect to the front portion 561. A part support portion 567 and a right-side channel forming portion 568 which are arranged at positions opposite to the reinforcing ribs 566. The part support portion 567 and the right flow path forming portion 568 are provided vertically rearward in the lower right portion of the front surface portion 561.

  The part support portion 567 has a shape of a letter “F” rotated by 90 degrees when viewed from behind (FIG. 14B (a)), and has a long plate portion 567a and a short plate that support the part member 560b from below. A portion 567b. The long plate portion 567a and the short plate portion 567b both have the same width in the front-rear direction and extend from the front portion 561, but the length (height) in the up-down direction is longer than that of the long plate portion 567a. Is longer than the short plate portion 567b. Further, the long plate portion 567a is disposed in parallel with the short plate portion 567b, and is disposed to the right of the short plate portion 567b.

  The front portion 561 has an upper edge portion 562 extending rearward perpendicularly to the front portion 561. The flat rolling portion 564 is inclined downward and to the lower right in the longitudinal direction so that the game ball can roll to the lower right. The rolling portion 564 extends substantially parallel to the upper edge portion 562, but the width of the upper edge portion 562 in the front-rear direction is shorter than the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction). Therefore, a foul ball can flow into the rolling portion 564.

  The base-side reinforcing rib 566 is opposed to the part support portion 567 and the right flow path forming section 568 with the front face portion 561 interposed therebetween, so that the right flow path formed between the part support section 567 and the right flow path forming section 568 is formed. Reinforce the flow path wall of 590c. In addition, the base-side reinforcing ribs 566 prevent sinks during molding (defectives such as dents caused by molding shrinkage).

  Further, the base member 560a includes a stepped bottom portion 571 having a left bottom surface portion 571a located on the left side and a right bottom surface portion 571b located lower right of the left bottom surface portion 571a. The bottom portion 571 extends vertically at the lower end of the front portion 561. The guide channel 590a formed on the left bottom surface portion 571a and the tray portion 572 extending from the front portion 561 in front of the guide channel 590a (the left bottom surface portion 571a) constitute a drop-out dispensing ball collection portion 570. I do. The saucer portion 572 has an L-shaped cross section in the front-rear direction, and receives a game ball spilled from the prize ball payout port 443 (FIGS. 4 and 12), and flows down to the rear guide channel 590a. The bottom of the tray portion 572 may be inclined backward and downward so that the game ball flows down to the guide channel 590a.

  In addition, the base member 560a has a central flow path forming portion 589 extending vertically rearward from the front surface portion 561. The central channel forming section 589 forms a central channel 590b together with the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12 and the front portion 561. In addition, the central channel forming portion 589 functions as a partition plate that partitions the guide channel 590a and the central channel 590b.

  In addition, the base member 560a has two engaging hooks 575a and 575b that are pushed into and attached to two engaged portions 598a and 598b provided on the installation surface 598 (FIG. 17) of the front frame 12.

  Next, the part member 560b will be described. The part member 560b includes a flat part body 576 arranged in parallel with the flat front part 561 of the base member 560a, an attachment part 578 arranged above the part body 576 and attached to the front part 561, Is provided. The part main body 576 has an upper end 576a that comes into contact with a step 564a at the rear end of the rolling portion 564 (rolling plate). The mounting portion 578 is formed so as to protrude forward from the part main body portion 576 and is mounted to the cylindrical screw receiving portion 561b (FIG. 14B (b)) of the front surface portion 561 from behind by screwing. Note that the mounting portion 578 has a through hole 578a through which the screw passes.

  Further, the part member 560b has a part-side box portion 579 provided at a lower part of the part main body portion 576 at the front. The upper end surface 580 of the part-side box portion 579 is an inclined surface on which the game ball can roll to the left. The side end surface 581 of the part side box portion 579 faces the side end surface (not shown) of the base side box portion 565 and is in contact with the right side. The side end surface 581 of the part side box portion 579 is inclined on the left side so as to be located rearward as going to the left side, but the side end surface of the base side box portion 565 is not inclined. Therefore, a narrow slit-shaped gap 592 exists on the left side between the base-side box portion 565 and the part-side box portion 579 (FIG. 15A). The width in the front-rear direction of the upper end surface 580 of the part-side box portion 579 is slightly narrower (shorter) toward the front end 580a (left end) of the upper end surface 580, but is smaller than the upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565. The width is constant.

  An opening 581a for screwing the part-side box portion 579 to the base-side box portion 565, and a square-shaped sharp portion 581b protruding rightward at the upper portion are provided on the side end surface 581 of the part-side box portion 579. , An elongated protruding engagement portion 584 that engages with the side end surface of the base-side box portion 565 is provided. The engagement portion 584 may have a function of positioning the part member 560b. The base of the sharp part 581b is supported from below by the short plate part 567b of the part support part 567, and the tip of the sharp part 581b contacts the long plate part 567a of the part support part 567 (FIG. 14B (a)).

  Further, the part member 560b includes a protruding portion 585 provided at the right end of the flat part main body 576 and a reinforcing rib 586 provided below the protruding portion 585 to support and reinforce the protruding portion 585. Prepare.

  The reinforcing rib 586 includes a right plate member 586a and a left plate member 586b that support the lower right and lower left portions of the protrusion 585, respectively. The width in the front-rear direction of the protrusion 585 is shorter than the width in the front-rear direction of the reinforcing rib 586 (the two plate members 586a, 586b). The front side of the upper ends of the two plate members 586a and 586b that is not connected to the protrusion 585 contacts the upper edge 562 of the base member 560a. The two plate members 586a and 586b both have the same width in the front-rear direction and abut on the front surface 561 of the base member 560a (FIG. 15A). The right plate member 586a and the left plate member 586b are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction, but the length (height) in the vertical direction is lower for the right plate member 586a and smaller for the left plate member 586b. Is long. The long plate portion 567a of the part support portion 567 is disposed in parallel with the right plate member 586a in contact with the right plate member 586a on the right side (FIG. 15A). Support the lower part from below.

  The protrusion 585 (ball stopper) serves as a barrier protruding above the upper edge 562 of the base member 560a (front surface 561) (FIGS. 14A (a) and 14B (a)). As described above with reference to FIG. 12, the foul ball (falling ball) returning from the firing ball guide passage 33 at the upper left of the foul ball catching unit 560 collides with the protrusion 585 and proceeds beyond the protrusion 585 to the right. It is difficult to flow into the ball catching unit 560. The foul ball returned from the shooting ball guide passage 33 may collide with the left plate-shaped member 586b of the reinforcing rib 586 as a barrier and flow into the foul ball catch unit 560.

  The projection 585 has a hollow mountain shape (a substantially “C” shape that is not closed at the lower left when viewed from the front) as if the single plate was folded at three places as a whole, and is hollow. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the generation of the collision sound between the foul ball and the projection 585, and it is possible to appropriately adjust the level of the collision sound. Further, the space defined by the two plate-shaped members 586a and 586b of the reinforcing rib 586 and the projection 585 can trap and attenuate the sound of collision between the foul ball and the projection 585.

[Flow and flow path of the game ball (in the foul ball catch unit)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17 (particularly, FIG. 14B (a)), a flow and a flow path of a game ball (foul ball) in the foul ball catching unit 560 will be described.

  The foul ball can flow into the rolling part 564 and roll. As a foul ball here, a foul ball (falling ball) that returned from the launching ball guide passage 33 and hit the projection 585 and bounced back, returned from the launching ball guide passage 33 but did not reach the projection 585. There is a foul ball (falling ball) or a foul ball (firing ball, direct ball) whose firing speed is too slow to exceed the foul ball catching unit 560. The game ball that has rolled down the rolling portion 564 flows into the large opening 595a between the rolling portion 564 and the protrusion 585. In addition, a foul sphere that bounces off after colliding with the protrusion 585 or a foul sphere with a low firing speed (launch sphere, direct sphere) may directly flow into the large opening 595a.

  The game ball (foul ball) that has passed through the large opening 595a flows into the base part inter-channel flow path 591 located on the upper end face 580 of the part side box part 579 and the upper end face 594 of the base side box part 565. The base-part flow path 591 is formed by the upper end surfaces 580 and 594, the front part 561 of the base member 560a, and the part body part 576 of the part member 560b. The flow path 591 between the base parts is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball can roll to the left.

  The width of the upper end surface 594 in the front-rear direction, that is, the amount of rearward projection of the base-side box portion 565 is longer than the width of the upper edge portion 562 in the front-rear direction. Can be dropped. Further, the width of the flow path 591 between base parts (here, substantially equal to the total width of the upper end face 580 and the upper end face 594 in the front-rear direction) is substantially equal to the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction). . Note that a configuration in which one of the part-side box portion 579 and the base-side box portion 565 (that is, one of the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594) may be omitted, in which case, the upper end surface 580 and the upper end surface 594 may be omitted. The other width may be substantially equal to the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction). In addition, if the sum of the widths of the upper end face 580 and the upper end face 594 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (the amount by which the game ball does not fall), the width of the rolling portion 564 in the front-rear direction (short direction) Can be shorter.

  The game ball that has passed through the inter-base-part flow path 591 flows into the central flow path 590b on the right side of the central flow path forming portion 589. The central flow path 590b is formed between the installation surface 598 of the front frame 12 and the front surface 561 of the base member 560a by the left end surfaces of the base side box portion 565 and the part side box portion 579, and the central flow path forming portion 589. Is done. The center channel 590b extends substantially in the vertical direction.

  The game ball that has passed through the central channel 590b flows into a bottom channel 590d formed on the right bottom surface portion 571b. Note that, as described above, the game balls that have spilled from the prize ball payout exit 443 (FIGS. 4 and 12) and entered the saucer portion 572 also pass through the guide channel 590a formed on the left bottom surface portion 571a. After that, it flows into the bottom channel 590d located at a position lower than the guide channel 590a.

  The game ball that has passed through the bottom channel 590d passes through the outlet 593, flows to the first inlet 461 (FIG. 6A) of the lower plate unit 29, and flows into the lower plate 23 from the first inlet 461.

  Further, a far ball (a shooting ball or a direct ball) from the right where the firing speed is very slow, or a rare ball (a falling ball) that rarely exceeds the protrusion 585 from the left, is formed with the parts supporting portion 567 and the right channel. The small opening 595b between the portions 568 can flow. The small opening 595b is smaller than the large opening 595a.

  The game ball that has passed through the small opening 595b flows into the right flow channel 590c formed between the right flow channel forming portion 568 and the long plate portion 567a of the parts support portion 567. The game ball that has passed through the right channel 590c passes through the outlet 593, flows into the first inlet 461 (FIG. 6A) of the lower plate unit 29, and flows into the lower plate 23 from the first inlet 461. Note that the small opening 595b and the right flow path 590c can be omitted, and can be omitted.

  The guide flow path 590a, the flow path 591 between base parts, and the bottom flow path 590d are visible from the above-mentioned three windows 561a of the base member 560a, respectively. 591, when a game ball is clogged in the bottom channel 590d, a thin stick or the like can be inserted from the window 561a to eliminate the clogging of the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, the width in the front-rear direction of the rolling part 564, the part supporting part 567, the right flow path forming part 568, the center flow path forming part 589, and the reinforcing rib 586 (two plate members 586a and 586b). Are substantially the same, but can be changed appropriately as long as the range is less than the diameter of the game ball.

[Countermeasures against fraud]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17 (especially, FIGS. 15 and 16), a countermeasure against fraud (a countermeasure against goto) in the foul ball catching unit 560 will be described.

  As described above, in the ball launching device 530 (launch unit), the cutting mechanism 544 that cuts the thread member of the illegal ball is provided as the first fraud countermeasure unit (first fraud countermeasure unit). Second to fourth fraud countermeasures (fraud countermeasures) are provided for taking fraud countermeasures.

  In the foul ball catching unit 560, countermeasures against impropriety (goto) performed in the following procedure are performed. First, a thread member (such as a fishing line) is attached to two game balls so as to form a pair, and one of the pair of game balls is fired at a slow speed by the ball firing device 530, and the ball is captured by the foul ball catch unit 560 as a foul ball. Drop it. Subsequently, the other game ball of the pair is fired at a normal speed and enters the game area 32. Then, the thread member attached to the foul ball that has entered the lower plate 23 from the foul ball catch unit 560 is operated from the lower plate 23, and the game ball in the game area 32 is illegally won at the winning opening. In this illegality, the operation of the hand operating the thread member is difficult to be seen by the lower plate 23, and it seems that the operation of bringing the game ball to the upper plate 21 is performed.

  In many cases, the cutting mechanism 544 (first anti-fraud means) can cut the thread member when operating the thread member after putting the game ball into the game area 32 (in some cases, the thread member cannot be cut at the time of firing). There is a case where the thread member attached to the foul ball cannot be cut.

  As described above, between the base box portion 565 and the part side box portion 579, a cut-out (split) gap 592 is provided on the left side. (Second fraud countermeasure unit).

  The thread member attached to the foul ball that has entered the lower plate 23 through the large opening 595a of the foul ball catching unit 560 is placed on the upper end surface 580 of the part side box portion 579 and the upper end surface 594 of the base side box portion 565. It passes through the located base-part flow path 591 from right to left, and passes through the central flow path 590b on the right of the central flow path forming portion 589 from top to bottom. In the above-mentioned misconduct, if the thread member attached to the foul ball is pulled from the lower plate 23 by hand, the thread member is caught in the cut-shaped gap 592, and it is difficult to operate and move the thread member.

  As described above, the side end surface 581 of the part-side box portion 579 is inclined so as to be located rearward toward the left side in order to provide the gap-shaped gap 592, but the inclination is steep from the right side to the left side. It has become. Accordingly, the entrance 592a of the gap 592 becomes wide, the thread member easily enters the gap 592, and when the thread member attached to the foul ball is pulled and separated from the lower plate 23 by hand and operated many times, the thread The member is gradually sandwiched in the gap 592, and eventually becomes immobile on the narrow right side of the gap 592, so that further operations cannot be performed.

  In addition, the upper surface 580, 594 may be provided with a large number of irregularities in the vertical direction to make the surface rough, so that friction with the thread member is increased and the thread member may be easily entangled with the gap 592. Further, it is also possible to form a cut-like gap 592 by providing an inclination on the side end surface of the base side box portion 565 instead of the side end surface 581 of the part side box portion 579.

  Next, the slit-shaped cut 596a (FIG. 16) formed on the upper part of the right channel forming portion 568 serves as a third fraud countermeasure unit (third fraud countermeasure unit).

  A shooting sphere (a foul sphere) having a very low shooting speed passes through the small flow path 590c from the small opening 595b and flows into the lower plate 23 of the lower plate unit 29. At this time, the thread member attached to the foul ball may enter the cut 596a and be pinched, and thereafter, it may be difficult to operate and move. Further, when the thread member attached to the foul ball is operated by pulling it from the lower plate 23 by hand, the thread member may enter the cut 596a and be caught.

  Next, the slit-like cuts 597a and 597b (FIG. 16) formed around the discharge port 593 serve as a fourth fraud countermeasure unit (fourth fraud countermeasure unit). In the present embodiment, the cut 597a is provided at the right end of the right bottom surface 571b. The notch 597b is provided at the lower end of the right flow path forming portion 568 and its peripheral members.

  The foul ball is finally discharged to the lower plate unit 29 through the discharge port 593 of the foul ball catch unit 560. At this time, the thread member attached to the foul ball enters the cuts 597a and 597b. It can be pinched and difficult to manipulate and move thereafter. Further, when the thread member attached to the foul ball is operated by manually pulling it from the lower plate 23, the thread member may enter the cuts 597a and 597b and be caught.

  In the foul ball catching unit 560, a cut or the like may be provided in the member around the other portion through which the thread member attached to the foul ball passes, so that the fraud ball catching unit can be used as a measure against fraud.

[Upper plate unit]
The upper plate unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 18 is a perspective view (a) of the upper plate unit 20 with the effect button unit 750 removed from the upper plate unit main body 680, and a top view of the upper plate unit 20. FIG. 19 is an exploded view of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680). The effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  The upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) includes a right lens member 681, a left lens member 682, an operation panel 690, an upper plate frame 700, an intermediate member 720, a button base 730, and a rear member 740. (FIG. 19).

  On the upper plate frame 700, a right lens member 681 and a left lens member 682 are arranged in front, and an operation panel 690 is arranged above. In the upper plate frame 700, an intermediate member 720 is disposed on the right rear side, and an LED board 726 is disposed on the left rear side. Further, a button base 730 is disposed substantially rearward on the upper plate frame 700, and a rear member 740 is disposed further rearward. The upper plate frame 700 accommodates the intermediate member 720, the LED substrate 726, and the button base 730, and is covered with the operation panel 690 from above and the rear member 740 from behind. Note that the LED substrate 726 may also be included in the category of the intermediate member 720.

  Each of the right lens member 681 and the left lens member 682 has a front upper dish lens that is transparent and diffuses light from behind, and a lens frame that is disposed behind the upper dish lens.

  The operation panel 690 includes the above-described balance display section 690a, ball lending button 690b, and return button 690c in the right button installation section 691, and the above-described volume adjustment buttons 690d, 690e in the left button installation section 692. , And a cross key 690f.

  Further, the operation panel 690 has an annular effect button housing portion 694 for housing the effect button unit 750. The effect button housing section 694 has a scale-like decoration attached to the surface in a stepped manner. The effect button unit 750 is inserted and housed in the opening 694a of the effect button housing part 694. The front plate part 696 that constitutes the front part of the effect button housing part 694 has a central sharp part 696a that is pointed forward at the center. The front plate portion 696 is composed of a right plate 696b and a left plate 696c, and a portion where the right plate 696b and the left plate 696c are connected becomes a center sharp portion 696a.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the upper plate frame 700 includes a bottom plate portion 701, a front portion 702 extending substantially upward from the bottom plate portion 701, and an upper plate portion 703 connected to the front portion 702 from behind the front portion 702. , A substantially C-shaped operation panel accommodating portion 704 connected between the front portion 702 and the upper plate portion 703.

  The front portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700 is provided with a speaker opening 702a into which the lower left speaker 19d is inserted. Further, a right lens base 706 to which a right lens member 681 is attached from the front and a left lens base 707 to which a left lens member 682 is attached from the front are connected to the front part 702.

  The right lens base 706 has an opening 706a through which light of each LED of the rear LED board 721 passes, and has a mounting portion 708 at the rear. The left lens base 707 has an opening 707a (not shown in FIG. 19) through which the light of each LED of the rear LED board 726 passes, and has a mounting portion 709 at the rear. The attachment portion 709 is attached to the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7).

  Further, a lower step portion 710 and an upper step portion 712 having a substantially L-shaped cross section in a front-rear direction and a cross section in a vertical direction (a cross section perpendicular to the left-right direction) are provided at the upper center of the front portion 702 (FIG. (See also (c) and FIG. 24 (a)). The upper portion 712 is formed at the upper end of the lower portion 710, and the upper portion 712 has a saucer-like shape, and is concave when viewed from the front (see also FIG. 24A). . The width of the upper portion 712 in the left-right direction is smaller than the width of the lower portion 710 in the left-right direction. Note that the lower portion 710 and the upper portion 712 are disposed behind the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690, and thus are covered and shielded by the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690. Therefore, unless the front plate 696 is transparent, the player cannot visually recognize the lower part 710 and the upper part 712 from the front. Note that a configuration in which the front plate portion 696 is made transparent for the purpose of producing an effect is also possible. The details of the lower part 710 and the upper part 712 will be described later.

  The upper plate portion 703 of the upper plate frame 700 abuts on the right side with the opening 703a into which the upper plate operation portion 735 is inserted from below and the plate-shaped communication terminal storage 743 (smartphone storage) of the rear member 740. Receiving portion 703b (right end).

  The intermediate member 720 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) has, on the right side, an LED substrate 721 disposed behind the right lens base 706 of the upper plate frame 700, and a substantially upper portion holding the LED substrate 721. And an LED board cover 723 that covers from the rear. Each of the plurality of LEDs provided on the LED substrate 721 is arranged at a position corresponding to the opening 706a of the right lens base 706. The intermediate member 720 has a mounting portion 722 behind the LED board cover 723. The attachment portion 722 is attached to the front frame base unit 480 (FIG. 7). Further, the intermediate member 720 has a receiving portion 724 that receives the shape of the holding portion 736 of the upper plate operating portion 735 in a form-fitting manner.

  On the button base 730 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680), an opening / closing mechanism 732, a relay board 737, and left and right reinforcing plates 739a and 739b (reinforcing members, reinforcing means) are installed from above with respect to the main body 731. It is a thing.

  The main body 731 includes a bottom portion 731a on which the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) is placed on the upper plate unit 20, and a right portion 731b provided on the right side of the bottom portion 731a. A box 731c having three rooms (spaces) partitioned by walls is provided at the center of the bottom 731a. At the right end and the left end of the bottom portion 731a, a right reinforcing plate attaching portion 731d to which the right reinforcing plate 739a is attached by screwing and a left reinforcing plate attaching portion 731e to which the left reinforcing plate 739b is attached by screwing, respectively. Be placed.

  In the main body 731, the bottom portion 731a to which the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) is attached, the right reinforcing plate attaching portion 731d, and the left reinforcing plate attaching portion 731e are inclined forward and downward, and the effect button unit 750 is also entirely The effect button unit 750 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the front side so that the front part of the effect button unit 750 is disposed lower than the rear part (see also FIG. 23B).

  The opening / closing mechanism 732 is installed on the right side 731b of the main body 731, and is operated by a player to cause the game ball of the upper plate 21 to flow down to the lower plate 23, and an upper plate operating portion 735; A holding portion 736 for holding the 735, an opening / closing lever 733 for moving (operating) the opening / closing member 734 in accordance with the operation of the upper plate operating portion 735, and an opening / closing lever 733 mounted on the side opposite to the upper plate operating portion 735 Opening and closing member 734 provided. When the opening / closing member 734 is opened, the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 are passed through the passage 485 (FIG. 8D) and the second inlet 465 (FIGS. 5B and 6A). A game ball flows down.

  The relay board 737 relays a detection signal relating to an operation of the player on the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) to the effect control device 300 (described later), or supplies power to the LED of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25). May be supplied.

  In the present embodiment, the relay board 737 is electrically connected to each of the LED board 721, the cross key 690f, the volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e, the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770 described later, and the like.

  The configuration related to the effect, such as the LED board 721, the cross key 690f, the volume adjustment buttons 690d and 690e, and the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770, is performed via the relay board 737 to the effect control device 300 (sub). Board). By connecting to the effect control device 300 (sub-board) via the relay board 737, the LED board 721, the cross key 690f, the volume control buttons 690d and 690e, the optical sensor 772 of the button unit base 770, and the like are provided. Wiring processing for connecting each to the effect control device 300 (sub-board) can be facilitated. In addition, the space for wiring for connecting each of these configurations to the effect control device 300 (sub-board) can be reduced.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the relay board 737 is not connected to the effect control device 300 (sub-board) like the balance display section 690a, the ball lending button 690b, and the return button 690c (configuration not related to the effect). And are not electrically connected. However, even in a configuration that is not directly connected to the effect control device 300 (sub-board), the effect control device 300 (sub-board) is temporarily integrated on the relay board 737 by being electrically connected to the relay board 737. ) May be configured to lead out the wiring toward a different substrate. With such a configuration, the wiring process can be simplified and the space for the wiring can be saved.

  The reinforcing plates 739a and 739b (reinforcing members, reinforcing means) support the operation panel 690 from below to reinforce the operation panel 690. The reinforcing plates 739a and 739b can prevent the operation panel 690 from sinking when the effect button unit 750 (the effect button 25) is operated.

  The rear member 740 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680) includes a back plate 742, a lower speaker 19d attached from the front at the left of the back plate 742, and an upper plate 21 provided above the back plate 742. , A plate-shaped communication terminal storage space 743 above the back plate 742 and to the right of the upper plate 21. The back plate 742 is provided with an opening / closing member opening 742a through which the opening / closing member 734 movably penetrates left and right and extends in the left-right direction. The upper plate 21 includes an upper plate bottom 21a and an upper plate wall 21b extending substantially perpendicularly from the upper plate bottom 21a.

  The communication terminal storage 743 has three protrusions 743a, 743b, 743c, and a protrusion 743d, and a groove between the protrusions 743a, 743b, and a groove between the protrusions 743b, 743c. A communication terminal such as a smartphone can be placed between the protrusions 743c and the protrusions 743d. Since the length of each groove in the left-right direction is different, it is easy to place the communication terminal according to the model (width of the communication terminal). Further, the lengths of the protrusions 743a, 743b, and 743c that form the grooves in the vertical direction may be different from each other. The different lengths in the vertical direction make it easier to place the communication terminal. The communication terminal storage space 743 is disposed behind the right button installation portion 691 of the operation panel 690 so as to be fitted between the upper plate portion 303 of the upper plate frame 700 and the right lens base 706.

[Direction Button Unit (Direction Button)]
The details of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) will be described with reference to FIGS. 20, 21, and 22 (see also FIG. 25B if necessary). FIG. 20 is an exploded view of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25). FIG. 21 is a front view (a) and a perspective view (b) of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25). FIG. 22 is a plan view (a) of the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) as viewed from above, and a perspective view (b) of the operation panel 690 with the effect button unit 750 and the right button installation portion 691 removed. It is.

  The effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) includes a button frame 752, a button lens 754, a button lens decoration 756, an in-button lens upper portion 758, an in-button lens lower portion 760, and a reflector 762, which are superimposed and combined. A reflector base 764, a button lower base 766, and a button unit base 770 are provided (see FIG. 20). Between the button lens 754 and the button lower base 766, a button lens decoration 756, a button inner lens upper part 758, a button inner lens lower part 760, a reflector 762, and a reflector base 764 are connected to the effect button unit 750 (the effect button 25). ) Are arranged in the direction of the central axis (see FIG. 20).

  The button lens 754, the button lower base 766, and the button lens decoration 756 therebetween are supported by the button unit base 770 via a coil spring (elastic member) not shown in FIG. In addition, as described later, the button frame 752, the upper lens 758 in the button, the lower lens 760 in the button, the reflector 762, and the reflector base 764 are fixing members fixed with respect to the button unit base 770. Does not work. Accordingly, the movable members are the button lens 754, the button lens decoration 756, and the button lower base 766. When the player presses the button lens 754, these movable members move from the initial position along the central axis direction (substantially in the up-down direction) and sink downward, and when there is no operation by the player, a coil spring (FIG. (Not shown) to move upward along the central axis and return to the initial position.

  The button frame 752 includes a front decorative portion 752a disposed on the front side, an opening 752b in which the button lens 754 is inserted and disposed, and a plurality of legs inserted into and engaged with the receiving portion 770f outside the button unit base 770. A part 752c. The button frame 752 is shaped like a shade with its central portion removed to form an opening 752b, and the outer peripheral surface (inclined surface 751c) is inclined downward radially outward, but is generally annular. It has the shape of

  The inner peripheral end 751a on the radially inner side of the opening 752b is formed at a position higher in the central axis direction than the outer peripheral end 751b on the radially outer side, and the inner peripheral end 751a is It is formed by bending downward from the surface 751c). The tip portion bent downward is configured to abut a flange portion 754b formed on a button lens body 754a described later.

  The inclined surface 751c extending from the radially inner inner peripheral end portion 751a of the opening portion 752b to the radially outer peripheral end portion 751b is smoothly connected to the inclined surface of the button lens 754 formed in a convex shape described later. The design is formed to have an oblique angle so that the player can see the boundary between the button lens 754 and the button frame 752 without a sense of discomfort.

  Further, front decoration portion 752a is arranged above central sharp portion 696a of operation panel 690. The button frame 752 is fixed to the button unit base 770 by a plurality of legs 752c, and does not move when the player operates the button lens 754.

  The button lens 754 is engaged with an annular portion 766b (wall portion) of a pot-like (tub-like) button-down base 766. The button lens 754 includes a circular button lens body 754a that is bulged at the center in a mountain shape, and a flange portion 754b in which the cross section in the radial direction of the button lens 754 is formed in an L-shape at the bottom of the button lens body 754a. , Is provided. An outer peripheral groove 754c is formed between the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens body 754a and the flange 754b. When the button lens body 754a is disposed inside the opening 752b formed in the button frame 752, a part of the flange 754b (the outer wall of the outer peripheral groove 754c) is formed at the inner peripheral end of the button frame 752. 751a. Therefore, even if the button lens 754 is urged by the coil spring, a part of the flange portion 754b abuts on the inner peripheral end portion 751a of the opening portion 752b, so that the button lens 754 protrudes above the button frame 752. Nothing.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (a), in a part of both sides in the left-right direction of the button lens body 754a, a notch is formed in the flange portion 754b so that an outer circumferential groove 754c is opened radially outward. A cutout side cutout 754f (described later) is formed. A screw receiving portion 754e (described later) is formed at the position of the side cutout portion 754f. In front of the button lens body 754a, a front cutout portion 754g (described later) is formed in the flange portion 754b so that the outer circumferential groove 754c is opened radially outward. The side cutout portion 754f and the front cutout portion 754g are formed in the circumferential direction with the lateral guide port 766i and the front guide port 766g formed in the button lower base 766, respectively (FIG. 21 also). reference).

  In the button lens body 754a, the flange 754b is recessed radially inward between the position of the side notch 754f where the screw receiving portion 754e is formed and the position of the front notch 754g. A flange recess 754h is formed. The flange recess 754h is also formed at a position that is line-symmetric with respect to a straight line that connects the side cutouts 754f formed in the left-right direction. These flange recesses 754h form avoiding portions that avoid the legs 752c extending downward from the button frame 752 toward the receiving portions 770f of the button unit base 770. Note that FIG. 22A also shows a receiving portion 770f of the button unit base 770 for convenience of explanation.

  In the button lens body 754a, peripheral portions of the button lens body 754a such as the outer peripheral groove 754c, the flange portion 754b, the screw receiving portion 754e, and the flange concave portion 754h are shielded by the above-described button frame 752 so as to be invisible to a player. ing. Therefore, as described later, when a fluid is dropped on the effect button unit 750 and flows, the button frame 752 constitutes a shielding unit that shields the fluid flowing around the effect button unit 750 from the player.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the button lens decoration 756 has a watch-like shape as a whole, and has a character portion 756a indicating the character “PUSH”, a circular button lens decoration main body 756b, and left and right band portions 756c. And left and right band ends 756d and left and right button lens engaging portions 756e. Since the button lens 754 is transparent, the character “PUSH” in the character portion 756a disposed below the button lens 754 can be visually recognized. The left and right button lens engaging portions 756e are engaged with the annular portion 766b (wall portion) of the pot-like button-down base 766.

  The button inner lens upper part 758, the button inner lens lower part 760, and the reflector 762 are combined to form an assembly (see FIG. 25B). The button inner lens upper portion 758 having a disk shape has a plurality (eight) of protrusions 758a protruding radially outward on the outer peripheral surface. The protrusions 758a arranged at equal intervals of 45 degrees have every other locking portion 758b on the lower side, and there are a total of four locking portions 758b. Each locking part 758b is inserted into a corresponding groove-shaped receiving part 760b of the button inner lens lower part 760, and is an upper button inner lens upper part 758 capable of transmitting light and a lower button inner lens capable of transmitting light. The lower part 760 is combined.

  A reflector 762 is attached to the upper portion 758 of the button inner lens from below by screwing. The reflector 762 is made of metal or has a metal-plated surface and can reflect light. The button inner lens lower part 760 having a substantially cylindrical shape accommodates the reflector 762 therein. The button inner lens lower part 760 includes two eaves 760a arranged at an interval of 180 degrees and a leg 760c extending below each eaves 760a.

  The reflector base 764 has an opening 764e at the bottom, has a mortar-like shape with the bottom removed, and has a substantially conical inner surface. The reflector base 764 is made of metal or metal-plated on the inside surface. The reflector base 764 is irregularly reflected, has irregularities 764a radially arranged in the radial direction, and irregularly reflects light.

  The reflector base 764 includes an engagement receiving portion 764b with which each leg 760c of the button inner lens lower portion 760 engages. As a result, the button inner lens lower part 760 is placed on the reflector base 764. Here, the lower end of the button inner lens lower part 760 is in contact with the upper side of the inner peripheral end of the reflector base 764 (defining the opening 764e), and the lower end of the reflector 762 is inserted into the opening 764e (FIG. 23). (B) and FIG. 25 (b)).

  In addition, the reflector base 764 includes a fitting portion 764c at the outer peripheral end thereof, to which each band end 756d of the button lens decoration 756 is slidably fitted. As a result, the reflector base 764 is sandwiched between the two band ends 756d of the button lens decoration 756. Then, when the player presses the button lens 754, each band end 756d slides along the fitting portion 764c as a groove in the center axis direction (substantially up and down direction).

  Further, the reflector base 764 has a leg 764d that penetrates through the lower button base 766 and engages with the button unit base 770. As a result, the reflector base 764, and thus the upper button inner lens 758, the lower button inner lens 760, and the reflector 762 are fixed to the button unit base 770.

  The button lower base 766 has a pot-like (tub-like) shape, a bottom 766a having a disk-like shape, an annular portion 766b extending vertically upward from the bottom 766a, and an annular shape. And a flange portion 766c (flange portion) extending radially outward from the upper end of the portion 766b. The button lower base 766 accommodates the LED substrate 767 in the bottom 766a of the accommodation portion 766d formed inside the annular portion 766b in the radial direction. The flange 766c (flange) of the button lower base 766 contacts the flange 754b of the button lens 754.

  The disk-shaped LED board 767 has one center LED 767a arranged at the center and eight peripheral LEDs 767b arranged around the center LED 767a. The lower end of the reflector 762 and the lower end of the reflector base 764 (around the opening 764e) are in contact with the LED board 767. The center LED 767a is arranged so as to be surrounded by the lower end of the reflector 762, and the eight peripheral LEDs 767b are arranged so as to surround the lower end of the reflector 762. That is, the center LED 767a is disposed radially inward of the lower end of the reflector 762, and the peripheral LED 767b is disposed radially outward of the lower end of the reflector 762 and radially inner than the lower end of the reflector base 764. (See FIG. 25B).

  The direct light from the central LED 767a and the indirect light reflected by the reflector 762 mainly pass through the substantially transparent inner lens portion 758 of the button, the button lens decoration 756, and the button lens 754, and the effect button unit 750. Go outside of the. The direct light from the peripheral LED 767b and the indirect light reflected by the reflector base 764 mainly pass through the lower lens 760 inside the button, the button lens decoration 756, and the button lens 754, and the outside of the effect button unit 750. Go out to.

  The annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766 is provided on both sides in the left-right direction with an engagement receiving portion 766e in which the button lens engaging portions 756e of the button lens decoration 756 are in contact with the screw receiving portion 754e. A screw hole portion 766f (female screw) for screwing the screw receiving portion 754e with a set screw, and a concave lateral guide port 766i arranged to face the engagement receiving portion 766e and the screw hole portion 766f radially outward. And.

  By screwing the screw receiving portion 754e formed on the button lens body 754a into the screw hole 766f, the flange portion 754b of the button lens 754 is pressed against the flange portion 766c (flange portion) of the button lower base 766. Also, a button lens engaging portion 756e formed on the button lens decoration 756 is provided with an engaging receiving portion 766e located below the button lens engaging portion 756e and a screw located above the button lens engaging portion 756e. It is sandwiched and fixed between the receiving portion 754e (see FIG. 21B).

  The screw hole 766f is disposed so as to straddle the engagement receiving portion 766e and the bottom of the lateral guide port 766i, and the opening of the screw hole is formed to be slightly convex upward. The screw hole portion 766f is formed to have an outer diameter such that it can be accommodated in a screw receiving portion 754e formed in the button lens body 754a when viewed from above. Since the screw receiving portion 754e is inserted into the concave lateral guide port 766i, the screw receiving portion 754e also has a function of positioning in a circumferential direction when the button lens 754 is attached to the button lower base 766.

  As will be described later, the horizontal guide port 766i allows the flowable fluid (liquid or the like) dropped on the effect button unit 750 to enter the effect button unit 750 from the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 inside the upper plate unit main body 680. Guide without passing through.

  Note that the fluid (liquid or the like) that has fallen on the button lens 754 enters the outer peripheral groove 754c by descending the surface of the button lens body 754a toward the outer peripheral surface 754d. Also, if the amount of the fluid (liquid or the like) dropped on the operation panel 690 is large, the fluid (liquid or the like) may go down the surface of the effect button housing portion 694, cross the button frame 752, and enter the outer peripheral groove 754c. Since the effect button unit 750 mounted on the bottom 731a of the button base 730 inclined downward to the front side is inclined downward to the front side, it is behind the lateral guide port 766i as shown in FIG. The fluid (liquid or the like) that has entered the outer peripheral groove 754c of (1) flows through the screw receiving portion 754e to the lateral guide port 766i. Note that the fluid from the horizontal guide port 766i flows into the panel-side recess 694b (FIG. 22B) provided in the button frame mounting portion 694c on which the button frame 752 is mounted. In the flange recess 754h, the gap through which the fluid passes in the outer peripheral groove 754c is narrow (it can be widened). However, the fluid can flow over the flange recess 754h and flow through a channel formed between the inner peripheral end 751a of the button frame 752 and the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens body 754a.

  In addition, the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766 has a concave shape at a front position on the outer peripheral surface, and protrudes radially outward of the annular portion 766b from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. A front guide port 766g is formed (see FIG. 21). In the present embodiment, the front guide port 766g is formed at the forefront of the outer peripheral surface. At a position corresponding to the front guide port 766g, the flange 766c (flange) is cut off. Therefore, the upper part of the front guide port 766g is open.

  Further, three ribs 776 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b surrounded by the concave protruding portion forming the front guide port 766g. Each of the ribs 776 extends in the vertical direction (from above to below) at substantially equal intervals, and each of the ribs 776 extends from above to below from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. It is formed so that the height becomes high.

  With this structure, the front guide port 766g guides a fluid such as a liquid from the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 to the inside of the upper plate unit main body 680 without passing through the effect button unit 750 as described later. At this time, each of the three ribs 776 flows from the front notch 754g of the button lens 754 to the inside of the front guide port 766g through the notch of the flange 766c (flange) of the button lower base 766. ) To make it easier to flow. Since the effect button unit 750 is inclined downward toward the front side, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the fluid (liquid) entering the outer circumferential groove 754c located ahead (before the dotted line) of the lateral guide port 766i. ) Flows from the front notch 754g to the front guide port 766g.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the lower button base 766 includes a light shielding plate 768 extending downward from the bottom 766a and four spring shafts 766h. The light-shielding plate 768 is moved downward together with the button lower base 766 by the operation of pressing the button lens 754 by the player, and is detected by the optical sensor 772 (the effect button switch 25a) of the button unit base 770. The spring shaft 766h is housed together with the coil spring in a spring chamber 770d of the button unit base 770 with a coil spring (not shown) being passed through and attached.

  The button unit base 770 includes a storage frame 770a that stores the motor 771, a lower outer wall 770b and an upper outer wall 770c that extend downward or upward from the storage frame 770a along the central axis direction (substantially up and down directions), respectively. Is provided. The storage frame 770a is mounted on the bottom 731a of the button base 730. The lower outer wall portion 770b connects to the button base 730. The upper outer wall portion 770c is arranged around the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766 so as to face the annular portion 766b (FIG. 25B).

  The button unit base 770 includes four spring chambers 770d for accommodating a spring shaft 766h to which a coil spring is attached, a vertical hole 770e into which each leg 764d of the reflector base 764 is inserted, and each leg of the button frame 752. And a receiving portion 770f to which the second member 752c is attached. Thus, the button frame 752 and the reflector base 764 are fixed to the button unit base 770, and the lower button base 766 is movably supported with respect to the button unit base 770.

  In addition, the button unit base 770 has a plurality of relaxation members 773 that alleviate the collision when the button-down base 766 sunk by the player pressing the button lens 754 collides with the button unit base 770. The button unit base 770 has an optical sensor 772 that detects the light-shielding plate 768 (described above) of the button-under base 766 when the player presses the button lens 754 so that the button-under base 766 sinks. The optical sensor 772 functions as a later-described effect button switch 25a that is turned on when the light blocking plate 768 blocks light generated from the light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit cannot receive light.

  The operation of the motor 771 housed in the housing frame 770a causes the entire effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) to vibrate, thereby prompting the player to operate the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25). Directing can be performed. The box portion 731c of the button base 730 is disposed below the motor 771, and can absorb noise of the motor 771.

[First storage unit (water storage unit)]
The first storage unit 713 (water storage unit) of the upper plate unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a front view (a) of the upper plate unit 20, a cross-sectional view (b) of a cross section taken along line AA of the front view (a) viewed from the left side, and an enlarged main part of the cross-sectional view (b). It is the principal part enlarged view (c) which was done. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view (a) of a top view of the upper plate unit 20 (similar to FIG. 18B) taken along line AA from the back side, and FIG. It is a front view (b) in the state where parts were removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A to 23C, in the upper plate unit 20, a front notch 754 g formed in the button lens body 754, and a front guide port 766 g formed in the button lower base 766. Are assembled so as to face the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752. In addition, the center sharp part 696a formed on the front plate part 696 of the operation panel 690 and the lower part 710 and the upper part 712 formed on the upper plate frame 700 are assembled so as to face each other. Note that the front decorative portion 752a of the button frame 752 is enlarged so as to face the lower portion 710 and the upper portion 712, or the central sharp portion 696a of the operation panel 690 is lengthened so as to face the front guide port 766g. Various configurations are also possible.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23B, in the button base 730 (main body portion 731), the upper end of the bottom portion 731a to which the effect button unit 750 (effect button 25) is mounted, the right reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d, and the left reinforcing plate mounting. The portion 731e is inclined downward toward the front with respect to the bottom plate portion 701, and is provided with an inclination angle such that the front portion of the effect button unit 750 is disposed lower than the rear portion. That is, the effect button unit 750 is inclined such that the end on the player side is lower than the end on the board side.

  As shown in FIGS. 19, 23 (a) and 24 (a), the lower portion 710 formed on the upper plate frame 700 is between the right lens base 706 and the left lens base 707 of the upper plate frame 700, that is, , Is formed at a substantially central portion of the front of the gaming machine, at a portion of the upper plate frame 700 protruding toward the player. The lower portion 710 has bottom surfaces 710a and 710b extending from the player side of the upper plate frame 700 toward the back of the gaming machine, and a back surface 710c extending above the gaming machine.

  When the center sharp portion 696a of the front plate 696 of the operation panel 690 is transparent, the bottom surfaces 710a and 710b of the lower portion 710 are visible to the player. In this case, in the lower portion 710, the bottom surfaces 710a and 710b are formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the player side, and a right lens base 706 extending rightward of the upper plate frame 700 and a left lens extending leftward. The design is connected to the base 707.

  Further, a tip portion 710d, which is near the vertex of the substantially V-shape of the lower portion 710, is formed so as to protrude forward (toward the player), and as described above, a cross section perpendicular to the left-right direction of the tip portion 710d. Have a substantially L-shape.

  The upper portion 712 is formed continuously from the upper end 710u of the back portion 710c of the lower portion 710, and has a bottom surface 712a extending from the player side to the back of the gaming machine and a back surface 712b extending above the gaming machine. The upper section 712 includes partition portions 712c and 712d in the left-right direction. The upper portion 712 has a saucer shape by a bottom surface 712a, a back surface 712b, and partition portions 712c and 712d, and is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front (FIGS. 21 (a) and 24). (See also (a)). The width of the upper portion 712 in the left-right direction (the interval between the partition portion 712c and the partition portion 712d) is smaller than the width of the V-shaped lower portion 710 formed in the left-right direction at the widest portion.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23C, in the front part of the effect button unit 750 in a state where the respective parts of the upper plate unit 20 are assembled, the outer side of the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens body 754 and the lower part of the button base 766 are formed. A communication space S1 is formed between the outside of the front guide port 766g formed in the annular portion 766b and the inside of the button frame 752 assembled so as to shield them. Note that water does not enter the rear side of the dotted line in FIG. The communication space S1 between the movable member (button lens 754, button lower base 766) and the fixed member (button frame 752) of the effect button unit 750 is a part of the flow path of the fluid (the arrow in FIG. 23C). Is configured. In the communication space S1, when the player presses the button lens 754, the width of the flow path increases in accordance with the movement of the movable member from the initial position to the lower side, and the fluid easily flows.

  In addition, the outside of the lower part 710 and the upper part 712 located at the forefront of the upper plate frame 700 in which the button base 730 and the effect button unit 750 (the button unit base 770) are accommodated, and the center sharp part 696a of the operation panel 690 A communication space S2 is formed between the inside and the inside. The communication space S2 is formed between the upper plate frame 700 and the operation panel 690 and is fixed, so that the flow path width does not increase in accordance with the movement of the movable member.

  Here, the communication space S1 constitutes delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid. The communication space S2 forms a first storage unit 713 (delay means) that delays the flow of the fluid. Note that the delay of the fluid includes the evaporation of the fluid accumulated in the first storage unit 713 from the gap (for example, the flow path to the first storage unit 713) between the components of the upper plate unit main body 680. Is also good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23C, the lower edge 753a of the front decoration portion 752a of the button frame 752 is in contact with the upper edge 698a of the center sharp portion 696a, and the center sharp portion of the operation panel 690 is formed. The lower edge 698b of the upper plate 696a is in contact with the tip 710d of the upper plate frame 700. Therefore, the communication space S1 and the communication space S2 are isolated from the outside of the gaming machine, and the fluid does not flow out of the gaming machine.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the effect button unit 750 has an outer peripheral groove 754c in the button lens body 754a, and a front notch 754g is formed on the front side of the outer peripheral groove 754c. . The front notch 754g is assembled with the front guide opening 766g formed in the button lower base 766 in alignment. As described above, as shown in FIGS. 23B and 23C, on the front side (player side) of the upper plate unit 20, a front notch 754g, a front guiding port 766g, and an upper plate The lower part 710 and the upper part 712 formed on the frame 700 are assembled so as to face the front decoration part 752a of the button frame 752 and the central sharp part 696a formed on the front plate part 696 of the operation panel 690.

  According to such a structure, in the front part of the effect button unit 750, the front notch 754g of the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 and the front guide port 766g formed in the button lower base 766 are used as operating means. The flow means capable of flowing the fluid flowing around the button lens 754 to the inside of the gaming machine.

  In addition, a communication space S1 formed between the outside of the front guide opening 766g and the inside of the button frame 752, and / or between the outside of the lower portion 710 and the upper portion 712 and the inside of the central sharp portion 696a. The communication space S2 can form a delay unit that delays the flow of the fluid that has flowed by the above-described flow unit.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, if there is a fluid dropped on the effect button 25, the surface of the button lens 754 that is arranged to be inclined forward (toward the player) flows toward the front. Then, it flows into the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754. The fluid flowing into the outer peripheral groove 754c flows toward the front side, passes through the front guide port 766g from the front notch 754g, and flows into the communication space S1. This delays the flow of the fluid into the gaming machine (the interior of the upper plate unit 20). Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), it flows into the communication space S2 (first storage part 713) and is stored here. In the communication space S2 (first storage portion 713), the fluid accumulates from above the lowermost lower portion 710 and then accumulates above the upper portion 712. When the volume of the fluid is large, after the communication space S2 is filled with the fluid, the fluid further passes over the upper portion 712 and runs on the back side of the upper portion 712, and the bottom plate portion of the upper plate frame 700. It can accumulate in the space on the front 701 and between the front part 702 and the button base 730. That is, this space constitutes a third storage section as delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid.

[Second storage unit (water storage unit)]
The second storage units 777a and 777b (water storage units) of the upper plate unit 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is a sectional view (a) of a top view of the upper plate unit 20 (similar to FIG. 18 (b)) taken along the line AA from the front, and an enlarged view of a main part of the sectional view (a). It is a part enlarged view (b). FIG. 26 is an enlarged view of a right main part (a) showing the right side of a section obtained by cutting the effect button unit 750 and its peripheral part along the diameter direction, and a left main part enlarged showing the left side. (B) and top views (c) and (d) showing a main part of the button base 730.

  As described with reference to FIG. 20, FIG. 21, and FIG. 23, the upper plate unit 20 includes a front notch 754g formed in the button lens body 754, and a front guiding port formed in the button lower base 766. 766 g and the front decorative portion 752 a of the button frame 752 correspond in position, and the central sharp portion 696 a of the operation panel 690 and the lower step portion 710 and the upper step portion 712 formed in the upper plate frame 700 are positioned. It is assembled to correspond. The lateral cutout 754f formed in the left and right direction of the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide port 766i of the button lower base 766 are also formed so as to correspond in position.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, an opening wall 695 that defines an opening 694a formed in the effect button receiving portion 694 of the operation panel 690 has a button frame for supporting the outer peripheral end portion 751b of the button frame 752. A mounting section 694c is provided. The button frame mounting portion 694c is formed to protrude in the radial direction toward the center of the substantially circular opening 694a. Further, the button frame mounting portion 694c has a radially outer side (left and right) at a position corresponding to (facing) the side cutout portion 754f and the lateral guide opening 766i formed in the effect button unit 750 fitted into the opening 694a. A panel-side recess 694b that is recessed toward the outer side in the direction is formed. In the present embodiment, the panel-side recess 694b accommodates a part of the lateral guide port 766i, but does not accommodate the lateral guide port 766i in a radial direction from the panel-side recess 694b so as to widen the flow path of the fluid. It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 26 (a) (see also FIG. 19), the bottom 731a of the button base 730 is formed in a concave shape surrounded by a side wall. In the central area of the bottom 731a, partitioning portions 732a and 732b that support the effect button unit 750 and partition the bottom 731a extend from the front side to the back side. Further, partition portions 732c and 732d extending in the left-right direction are formed so as to partition the space between the partition portions 732a and 732b. The above-described box portion 731c is formed by partition portions 732a and 732b and partition portions 732c and 732d.

  Thus, a bottom enclosing portion 730a is formed on the bottom 731a between the partition 732a and the bottom side wall 732e. A bottom surrounding portion 730b is formed between the partition 732b and the bottom side wall 732f.

  In the bottom portion 731a, a spring chamber receiving portion 732g that supports the spring chamber 770d of the button unit base 770 in the effect button unit 750 is provided on each of the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b upward from the bottom surface of the bottom portion 731a. It is erected.

  A base 730c is formed outside the right bottom side wall 732e below the upper end of the bottom side wall 732e and higher than the bottom surface of the bottom 731a. The pedestal portion 730c is provided with a pedestal portion 730e surrounded by a side wall. A right-side reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d to which the lower end of the right-side reinforcing plate 739a is mounted is erected upward from the bottom surface of the bottom surrounding portion 730e at the base surrounding portion 730e.

  Similarly, a platform 730d is formed outside the left bottom side wall 732f, and a platform enclosing portion 730f is formed in the platform 730d. A reinforcing plate mounting portion 731e is provided upright on the base surrounding portion 730f from the bottom surface of the base surrounding portion 730f.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (b) and FIG. 26 (a), on the right side of the effect button unit 750, the inner peripheral end 751a on the radial inside of the opening 752b of the button frame 752 is bent downward, The tip portion abuts on a flange portion 754b formed on the button lens body 754a. Further, the outer peripheral end 751b on the outer side in the radial direction comes into contact with a button frame mounting portion 694c formed in the opening 694a of the operation panel 690.

  For this reason, the side cutout 754f formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens main body 754a, the outside of the lateral guide port 766i formed in the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766, and the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens main body 754a. A communication space S3 is formed between the inside of the button frame 752 attached so as to cover. That is, the communication space S3 is provided between the button frame 752 and a portion (such as the lateral guide port 766i) installed facing the button frame 752.

  As described above, the communication space S3 between the movable member (the button lens 754) and the fixed member (the button frame 752) of the effect button unit 750 forms a part of the flow path of the fluid (the arrow in FIG. 26A). Constitute. In the communication space S3, when the player presses the button lens 754, the width of the flow path increases in accordance with the movement of the movable member from the initial position to the lower side, and the fluid easily flows.

  In addition, it passes between the outside of the button lower base 766 in the radial direction and the panel side recess 694b and the opening wall 695 formed in the operation panel 690, and the outside of the button unit base 770 in the radial direction and the right reinforcing plate 739a (and the opening). A communication space S4 connected to the wall 695) is formed. That is, the communication space S4 is provided between the operation panel 690 and a portion (such as the button lower base 766) installed facing the operation panel 690, and a right-side reinforcing plate 739a abutting on the operation panel 690; It is provided between a portion (such as a button unit base 770) provided to face the right reinforcing plate 739a.

  The communication space S4 also forms part of the flow path of the fluid (the arrow in FIG. 26A). The communication space S4 is further connected to a pedestal surrounding portion 730e in which the right reinforcing plate mounting portion 731d is formed.

  The communication space S4 between the movable member (bottom button base 766) of the effect button unit 750 and the fixed member (operation panel 690) moves the movable member downward from the initial position by the player pressing the button lens 754. However, if there is a fluid, the fluid is easily pushed or drawn into the movable member (the base under the button 766) and flows easily. The communication space S4 between the button unit base 770 and the right reinforcing plate 739a or the operation panel 690 is fixed, and does not change according to the movement of the movable member.

  Similarly, on the left side of the effect button unit 750, a side cutout 754f formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens main body 754a and an outer side of the lateral guide port 766i formed in the annular portion 766b of the button lower base 766. A communication space S5 is formed between the button frame 752 attached to cover the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens body 754a. The communication space S5 between the movable member (the button lens 754) and the fixed member (the button frame 752) of the effect button unit 750 forms a part of the flow path of the fluid (the arrow in FIG. 26B). In the communication space S5, when the player presses the button lens 754, the width of the flow path increases in accordance with the movement of the movable member from the initial position to the lower side, so that the fluid can easily flow.

  Further, it passes between the outside in the radial direction of the button lower base 766, the panel side recess 694 b formed in the opening 694 a of the operation panel 690 and the opening wall 695, and the outside of the button unit base 770 in the radial direction and the left reinforcing plate. A communication space S6 that is connected to the communication space 739b is formed. The communication space S6 is further connected to a pedestal surrounding portion 730f where the left reinforcing plate attachment portion 731e is formed.

  The communication space S6 between the movable member (bottom button base 766) of the effect button unit 750 and the fixed member (operation panel 690) moves the movable member downward from the initial position by the player pressing the button lens 754. However, if there is a fluid, the fluid is easily pushed or drawn into the movable member (the base under the button 766) and flows easily. The communication space S6 between the button unit base 770 and the left reinforcing plate 739b is fixed and does not change according to the movement of the movable member.

  According to such a structure, the side cutout portion 754f of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide opening 766i formed in the button lower base 766 are provided as operating means in the left and right lateral side portions of the effect button unit 750. The flow means capable of flowing the fluid flowing around the button lens 754 to the inside of the gaming machine.

  Further, communication spaces S3 and S5 formed between the outside of the lateral guide opening 766i and the inside of the button frame 752, communication spaces S4 and S6 formed between the operation panel 690 and the outside of the effect button unit 750, and In addition, the base surrounding portion 730e and the bottom surrounding portion 730f can constitute a delay unit that delays the flow of the fluid that has flowed by the above-described flow unit.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if there is a fluid (liquid or the like) that spreads and flows on the surface of the effect button 25, it flows from the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens 754 into the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754. can do. In addition, a large amount of a fluid (such as a liquid) flowing down the surface of the effect button housing portion 694 of the operation panel 690 may enter the outer peripheral groove 754c beyond the button frame 752 if the amount is large. The fluid that has flowed into the outer peripheral groove 754c on the back side (the rear side from the dotted line in FIG. 22A) with respect to the lateral guide port 766i is the side notch 754f formed in the outer peripheral groove 754c and the circle of the button lower base 766. After passing through the horizontal guide port 766i formed in the ring portion 766b, it flows into the communication spaces S3, S5. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the fluid flows into the communication spaces S4 and S6, and as shown by the hatched portion in FIG. It is stored in the surrounding part 730f. Then, as shown by the hatched portion in FIG. 26C, when the volume of the flowing-in fluid exceeds the capacities of the base surrounding portion 730e and the base surrounding portion 730f, the fluid is moved to the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730e. It can flow into the part 730b. Note that the fluid does not flow into the box portion 731c formed by the partition portions 732a and 732b.

  As described above, the base surrounding part 730e and the base surrounding part 730f can constitute the second storage units 777a and 777b (delay means) for delaying the flow of the fluid. Further, the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b can constitute additional storage portions 778a and 778b (delay means for delaying the flow of the fluid) as buffers of the second storage portions 777a and 777b.

  When the volume of the fluid is large, the fluid is filled with the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b after the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b (reserving portions 778a and 778b) are filled with the fluid. Above the front wall upper end portion, and along the front side of the front wall of the bottom enclosing portion 730a and the bottom enclosing portion 730b, the third storage portion (on the bottom plate portion 701 of the upper plate frame 700 and the front portion 702). In the space between the button base 730 and the button base 730). That is, the third storage unit can constitute a common buffer water storage unit of the communication space S2 described above and the bottom surrounding part 730a and the bottom surrounding part 730b. It should be noted that the top portion 730e and the top portion 730f (second storage portions 777a, 777b) of the base portion surrounding portion 777f (lower portions that are not covered with the reinforcing plates 739a, 739b) travel along the surface of the button base 730. Alternatively, the fluid may fall (fall) into the third storage unit.

[Fluid outlet (liquid outlet)]
The fluid discharge port (liquid discharge port) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a front view illustrating the discharge port 779. As described above, the fluid that flows into the communication space S1, flows through the communication spaces S3 and S5, and is stored in the communication space S2 (first storage unit 713), passes through the communication spaces S4 and S6, and passes through the base. The fluid stored in the surrounding portion 730e and the base surrounding portion 730f (second storage portions 777a and 777b), or the fluid stored in the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b (preliminary storing portions 778a and 778b). May be provided for discharging the outside of the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, “storage the fluid inside the gaming machine and discharge the stored fluid to the outside of the gaming machine” includes “delaying the flow of the fluid”. In addition, without providing the discharge port 779 in particular, the fluid is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine through a minute gap between the components of the upper plate unit 20 (for example, a clearance generated by a tolerance between the operation panel 690 and the upper plate frame 700). It may be configured to discharge gradually.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the discharge port 779 is formed at a position (right side position) near the operation handle 24 in a lower portion of the front surface portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700. The discharge port 779 is provided in the vicinity of the right protruding portion 29b protruding on the right side of the lower plate unit 29 and opposed to the right protruding portion 29b. The discharge port 779 includes the communication space S2 (first storage portion 713), the base portion surrounding portion 730e and the base portion surrounding portion 730f (second storage portions 777a and 777b), the bottom surrounding portion 730a and the bottom surrounding portion 730b (preliminary storing portion). 778a, 778b) are communicated with each other by a channel formed invisible to a player inside the gaming machine. For example, a flow path (groove) from the communication space S2 (first storage portion 713) to the discharge port 779 may be formed invisible behind the front surface portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700 (dotted line in FIG. 27). .

  In the present embodiment, the discharge port 779 is formed at a position near the operation handle 24 on the front portion 702 of the upper plate frame 700 because of the lower plate 23 in which game balls are stored and switches on the operation panel 690. This is to prevent the discharged fluid from spreading. If the game ball flows into the game area in a wet state, it may be a factor to accelerate deterioration of members such as nails and a circulation structure of the game ball. For this reason, the discharge port 779 may be any position as long as the discharged fluid does not interfere with the game balls, the operation panel of the game machine, the island facilities, and the like, and is not limited to the above-described position.

  The outlet 779 is provided with a sealing material capable of being sealed, and the outlet may be opened as necessary. Further, the outlet 779 may be a mechanism that can be opened only by an administrator as needed.

[Spherical channel unit]
Subsequently, the spherical channel unit 783 arranged on the back side of the front frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 28 is a back view (a) and a cross-sectional top view (b) of the outer frame unit 17 (or the front frame 12). FIG. 29 is an exploded view of the outer frame unit 17 (or the front frame 12). FIG. 30 is an exploded view of the spherical channel unit 783. FIG. 31 is a back view (a) and a transparent front view (b) of the spherical flow channel unit base 786.

  The front frame 12 has, on the back side, an external information terminal 71 capable of outputting information relating to the gaming machine 10 to an external device (a game machine internal management device such as a hall computer), and a game supplied from a replenishing device installed in the island facility. An upper tank 448 for storing balls, a payout unit 780 for paying out gaming balls flowing down from the upper tank 448 to the upper plate 21, a payout control device 200 for controlling the payout unit 780, and a power supply for supplying power to various devices. And an apparatus 400 (FIG. 28A).

  The front frame 12 also includes an effect control relay board 781 and a stand-to-stand relay board 782 on the back side. The effect control relay board 781 has an effect connection unit and the like connected to the electric wiring from the effect control device 300. The board-to-board relay board 782 is a board that is electrically connected to a board-to-board apparatus arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. The stand-to-stand device is, for example, a card sand or a cash sand disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 10. Note that the payout control device 200, the power supply device 400, the effect control relay board 781, and the inter-stand relay board 782 may be configured as one unit (FIG. 29).

  As described above, the front frame 12 has the ball launching device 530 and the foul ball catching unit 560 on the front side (FIG. 28B).

  The front frame 12 includes a ball channel unit 783 between the power supply device 400 and the foul ball catching unit 560, and a firing control device 784 that controls the ball firing device 530 between the payout control device 200 and the ball firing device 530. (Launch control board). The spherical channel unit 783 and the launch control device 784 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (FIGS. 28B and 29).

  As will be described later, the ball channel unit 783 receives the game ball flowing down from the out port 30b of the game board 30 and flows the ball to the out tank. Further, the ball channel unit 783 supplies the game balls (prize balls) from the payout unit 780 to the upper plate 21 via the prize ball payout port 443, or when the upper plate 21 is full, The game balls from the payout unit 780 are supplied to the lower plate 23 through the first inlet 461 of the lower plate unit 29.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the spherical channel unit 785 includes a front lid member 785, a spherical channel unit base 786 that abuts the front lid member 785 from behind, and a rear lid member that abuts the spherical channel unit base 786 from behind. 787. The ball channel unit base 786 is sandwiched between the front lid member 785 and the rear lid member 787 from the front and rear, and various game ball channels are formed therein.

  The front lid member 785 has a concave receiving portion 785a into which the winning ball payout port 443 of the spherical channel unit base 786 fits. Further, as will be described later, the front lid member 785 has out-sphere flow paths 785b and 785c formed by flow path walls extending to the rear surface (FIG. 31B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, the ball channel unit base 786 has an upper left connection passage 786a connected to the lower part of the payout unit 780 and supplied with game balls (prize balls) from the payout unit 780. Further, the spherical flow path unit base 786 has an intermediate plate 786b arranged substantially at the center in the front-rear direction. On the front side in front of the intermediate plate 786b, the ball channel unit base 786 flows downward from the prize ball payout port 443 into which game balls from the connection passage 786a flow, and from the out port 30b of the game board 30 which opens upward. An out ball receiving port 786g for receiving the played game ball and an out sensor 786h for detecting the out ball are provided. The prize ball payout opening 443 is a rectangular opening when viewed from the front, and opens at the front and the intermediate plate 786b. The out sensor 786h may be used as an out ball detection switch 74 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a), on the back side behind the intermediate plate 786b, the ball channel unit base 786 includes a shelf 786c for receiving game balls (prize balls) from the connection passage 786a, and a shelf 786c. And an overflow channel 786d into which game balls from the connection passage 786a flow when the game balls overflow. The game ball that has entered the shelf 786c flows into the prize ball payout port 443. The game ball from the prize ball payout port 443 is further supplied to the prize ball inlet 484 of the upper plate 21. When the upper plate 21 is full (full), the game ball overflows to the shelf 786c (overflow), so that the game ball from the connection passage 786a cannot enter the shelf 786c, and the overflow channel 786d. (Arrows in FIG. 31A). The overflow channel 786d is formed by a channel wall extending behind the intermediate plate 786b. The game balls that have passed through the overflow channel 786d are supplied to the lower plate 23 via the first inlet 461 of the lower plate unit 29.

  Further, on the back side behind the intermediate plate 786b, the ball flow unit base 786 includes an overflow sensor 786e for detecting a collision pressure (ball pressure) of a game ball (overflow ball) in the overflow flow path 786d, and an overflow sensor. And a ball pressure receiving member 786f that is arranged on the left side of the 786e. The ball pressure receiving member 786f is allowed to face the notch at the right end of the overflow channel 786d so as to be swingable by the support shaft at the upper end. The overflow sensor 786e sends a signal to the game control device 100 when the ball pressure receiving member 786f is pressed rightward by the ball pressure.

  The spherical channel unit base 786 further includes a special channel 786i formed substantially in parallel with the overflow channel 786d on the back side behind the intermediate plate 786b. For example, the special flow path 786i may be used as a recovery flow path for opening the valve of the upper tank 448 and causing the game balls from the upper tank 448 to flow down and recover to the outside of the gaming machine 10. The special channel 786i is also formed by a channel wall extending behind the intermediate plate 786b.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, in the front lid member 785, an upper out-spherical flow path 785b and a lower out-spherical flow path 785c are formed by flow path walls extending to the back surface. A game ball (out ball) from the out ball receiving port 786g flows into the upper out ball channel 785b. The game ball that has passed through the upper out-ball flow path 785b flows into the lower out-ball flow path 785c that communicates with the upper out-ball flow path 785b, and is then collected in the out tank. The above-mentioned out sensor 786h (out ball detection switch 74) provided on the ball channel unit base 786 is disposed at the connection between the upper out ball channel 785b and the lower out ball channel 785c.

(Visual window)
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a description will be given of the viewing window 789 provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit). FIG. 32 is a right side view (a) of the glass frame 15 and a partially enlarged view (b) thereof, and a perspective view (c) viewed obliquely from below the glass frame 15 and a partially enlarged view (d) thereof. is there.

  The viewing window 789 includes a front frame base unit 480 of the glass frame 15 (or a back plate 742 of the rear member 740 of the upper plate unit 20 (FIG. 19)) and a front portion 702 of the upper plate unit 20 (FIG. 19). Formed between the rear end portions 702c. The viewing window 789 is located below the mounting portion 722 of the upper plate unit 20 (upper plate unit main body 680).

  The viewing window portion 789 is for viewing the inside of the upper plate unit 20 attached to the glass frame 15 from the right or the like when the glass frame 15 is opened with respect to the front frame 12. A transparent cover for protecting the inside of the upper plate unit 20 may be fitted into the viewing window 789. When the glass frame 15 is closed with respect to the front frame 12, the viewing window 789 is closed by the right protrusion 29 b (FIG. 5) of the lower plate unit 29.

  Through the viewing window 789, the above-mentioned opening / closing lever 733 (FIG. 19) in the upper plate unit 20 and its operation can be viewed from the right. The opening / closing lever 733 is for moving the opening / closing member 734 in accordance with the operation of the upper plate operating section 735. When the opening / closing member 734 is opened, the game balls on the upper plate 21 flow down to the lower plate 23. Even when the opening / closing lever 733 is in the upper plate unit 20, it can be visually observed through the viewing window 789 by external light from the right lens member 681 or light leaking from the LED board 721, and the operation of the opening / closing member 734 is confirmed. be able to.

  In addition, the above-described LED board 721 (FIG. 19) in the upper plate unit 20 and the light emitting operation thereof can be visually recognized from the obliquely lower rear side through the viewing window 789. The front portion 702 and the right lens member 681 of the upper plate unit 20 are located at the lower right side of the front frame base unit 480 and have a curved bay end 480c and the right side of the back plate 742 of the upper plate unit 20. And bulges outward beyond the curved bay entry end 742c located at. Therefore, the LED substrate 721 that irradiates the right lens member 681 with light can be visually recognized through the viewing window 789.

[Projection production unit (decoration device)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, the projecting effect units provided on both sides of the glass frame 15 (front frame unit), that is, the decorative devices 18b and 18c will be described. FIG. 33 is an exploded view (a) in which the decoration devices 18b and 18c are separated from the glass frame 15 and an exploded view (b) of one of the projecting effect units (the decoration device 18b). FIG. 34 is a front view of one protruding effect unit (decoration device 18b).

  As shown in FIG. 33A, the decoration devices 18b and 18c are attached to attachment portions 790a and 790b on both left and right sides of the front frame base unit 480, respectively. The decorating devices 18b, 18c are provided outside the vertical plates 482b, 482c of the front frame inner member 482, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the protruding effect unit (decorative device 18b) is combined with the LED substrate 791, the back cover 792, the reflector 793, the inner lens 794, the side cover 795, and the outer lens. 796.

  The LED board 791 has a plurality (10) of LEDs 791a in the left column and a plurality (16) of LEDs 791b in the right column, and is attached to the attachment portion 790a on the right side of the front frame base unit 480. The transparent back cover 792 is disposed in front of the LED board 791 and is fixed to the reflector 793 and the inner lens 794. In the back cover 792, a plurality of concave portions 792a at the left end of the jagged shape correspond to the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left column. For this reason, the back cover 792 covers a part of the plurality of LEDs 791b in the right column, but does not cover the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left column. The reflector 793 is entirely made of metal or metal and reflects light, and is fixed to the back cover 792. The reflector 793 has a plurality of (ten) openings 793a at positions facing the plurality of LEDs 791a in the left column.

  The inner lens 794 is fixed to the back cover 792 and is arranged so as to sandwich the reflector 793 together with the back cover 792. The left side of the inner lens 794 is geometrically adapted to the reflector 793. The inner lens 794 is made of a resin colored milky white and slightly transmits light. The inner lens 794 and the outer lens 796 are fixed to the side cover 795 at the same location. The side cover 795 has a plurality of openings 795a as decorations. The transparent outer lens 796 covers the inner lens 794 and engages with the reflector 793. The outer lens 796 has a plurality of engagement receiving portions 796a that respectively engage with the plurality of engagement portions 793b of the reflector 793.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the LEDs 791a in the left column of the LED board 791 are located at the openings 793a of the reflector 793 and are exposed, and thus can be visually recognized through the transparent outer lens 796. Direct light from the left row of LEDs 791a and reflected light (indirect light) reflected by the reflector 793 from the left row of LEDs 791a are directed toward the center side (inside) of the gaming machine 10 via the transparent outer lens 796. Since the light reaches the player, an effective light emitting effect can be achieved. In addition, since the back cover 792 does not cover the left row of LEDs 791a, the light from the LEDs 791a can pass straight through the opening 793a of the reflector 793 without being refracted by the back cover 792.

  On the other hand, the LED 791b in the right column of the LED board 791 is not exposed because it is covered with the inner lens 794 (dotted line in FIG. 34) colored in milky white. The right row of LEDs 791b illuminates the outside of the gaming machine 10 softly through the inner lens 794, and thus has a different lighting mode from that of the left row of LEDs 791a. And

[Operation and Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including the display device (for example, the display device 41) capable of executing a predetermined effect includes operating means (effect button unit 750, operation panel 690, and the like) that can be operated by the player. A flow means (for example, an outer peripheral groove 754c, a front guide port 766g, a horizontal guide port 766i) capable of flowing a fluid flowing around the operation means into the inside of the gaming machine, and a flow of the fluid flowing by the flow means. (For example, the communication space S2 (storage portion 713), the base portion surrounding portions 730e and 730f (storage portions 777a and 777b), the bottom surrounding portions 730a and 730b (storage portions 778a and 778b), and the communication space S1 , Communication spaces S3, S4, S5, S6). The operating means may include a circuit board (for example, the LED board 767 and the relay board 737), and may incorporate the circuit board, for example.

  In such a gaming machine 10, the fluid can be flowed into the gaming machine by the flowing means, and the fluid flowing into the gaming machine by the flowing means can be delayed by the delay means. Delay flow. Therefore, during the game of the player, the fluid flows along the surface of the gaming machine 10 (the surface of the upper plate unit 20 or the like) to the player side, so that the player is distracted by the fluid and plays the game. It is possible to reduce situations in which interest is reduced.

  Further, in such a gaming machine 10, since a fluid such as water does not enter the operation means (such as the effect button unit 750), a malfunction (failure) of a circuit board (electronic component) in the operation means caused by water leakage or the like may occur. There is no inconvenience that the operation effect related to the game cannot be executed, and the interest of the player can be continued. Further, in such a gaming machine 10, a game area generated by discharging a fluid such as water out of the gaming machine and causing a dirty game ball touching the fluid to enter the gaming machine (game area 32). Deterioration of the members and the like in 32 can be prevented. Further, according to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to reduce the trouble of cleaning the fluid discharged from the gaming machine.

  Further, according to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes the shielding means (for example, the button frame 752) for shielding the fluid flowing around the operation means from the player.

  In such a gaming machine 10, even when a fluid is dropped on the operation means during the game of the player, the fluid flowing around the operation means (the effect button unit 750) by the shielding means. Is shielded from the player, so that the player is not distracted by the fluid and does not detract from the interest.

  Further, according to the first embodiment, the delay unit is configured to store at least a part of the fluid (for example, the communication space S2 (the storage unit 713), and the pedestal surrounding parts 730e and 730f (the storage units 777a and 777b)). , Bottom encircling portions 730a and 730b (reserving portions 778a and 778b)).

  In such a gaming machine 10, at least a part of the fluid can be stored in the storage part by the delay means having the storage part. Thus, even when the volume of the fluid is large, the flow of the fluid can be greatly delayed, and the player does not become distracted by the fluid and lose interest.

  According to the first embodiment, the circuit board (for example, the LED board 767 in the effect button unit 750, the balance display section 690a arranged on the operation panel 690, the ball lending button 690b, and the electronics for the return button 690c) The circuit board 697a (see FIG. 25), the volume control buttons 690d and 690e, and the electronic circuit board 697b for the cross key 690f (see FIG. 25) are provided with delay means (for example, the storage unit 713, the storage units 777a and 777b). , 778a, 778b).

  In such a gaming machine 10, the fluid flows into the LED board 767 in the effect button unit 750, the electronic circuit board 697 a (see FIG. 25) disposed on the operation panel 690, and the electronic circuit board 697 b (see FIG. 25). Since the fluid flows toward the delay means located at a lower position than the circuit board, the circuit board can be prevented from contacting the fluid.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the effect button unit 750 is inclined forward and downward such that the end on the player side is lower than the end on the board side. For this reason, the fluid dropped on the effect button unit 750 is caused to flow toward the player side (front), and is immediately sent to the flowing means (the front guide port 766g) connected to the delay means (communication spaces S1 and S2). Can be guided.

  Also, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, three ribs 776 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b surrounded by the concave protruding portion forming the front guide opening 766g in the button lower base 766. Can be Each of the ribs 776 extends in the vertical direction (from above to below) at substantially equal intervals, and each of the ribs 776 extends from above to below from the outer peripheral surface of the annular portion 766b. It is formed so that the height becomes high. Therefore, the fluid easily flows along the rib 776 and flows into the front guide port 766g.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the outer side of the outer peripheral surface 754d of the button lens body 754 and the lower button base 766 are provided at the front part of the effect button unit 750 in a state where the respective components of the upper plate unit 20 are assembled. The fluid flows into the communication space S1 formed between the outside of the front guide port 766g formed in the annular portion 766b and the inside of the button frame 752 assembled so as to shield them. After that, the outside of the lower step 710 and the upper step 712 located at the front of the upper plate frame 700 in which the button base 730 and the effect button unit 750 (button unit base 770) are accommodated, and the center sharp part 696a of the operation panel 690 The fluid flows into the communication space S2 formed between the inside and the inside.

  The communication spaces S1 and S2 are inside the gaming machine and are isolated from the outside, and the fluid does not flow out from the middle of the communication spaces S1 and S2. People are not distracted by the fluid and do not detract from the interest.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the lower portion 710 of the first storage section 713 has bottom surfaces 710a and 710b formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the player side. Therefore, it is easy to store the fluid under the lower portion 710. Also, when the center sharp portion 696a of the front plate portion 696 of the operation panel 690 is transparent, the bottom surfaces 710a and 710b of the lower portion 710 are visible to the player. In this case, the bottom surfaces 710a and 710b of the lower portion 710 at positions visible to the player are connected to a right lens base 706 extending rightward of the upper plate frame 700 and a left lens base 707 extending leftward. It has been. For this reason, the configuration is such that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine is not impaired while having the function of storing the fluid.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the width of the upper portion 712 in the left-right direction (the interval between the partition portion 712c and the partition portion 712d) is the widest in the left-right direction of the V-shaped lower portion 710. Is narrower than the width of the portion formed at the bottom. For this reason, the fluid that has flowed down from the upper section 712 can quickly flow into the wider lower section 710.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the lateral notch 754f formed in the left and right direction of the outer peripheral groove 754c of the button lens 754 and the lateral guide port 766i of the button lower base 766 correspond in position. Is formed. This allows the fluid to flow not only in the front direction of the effect button unit 750 but also in the side direction (left and right direction).

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, on the right side of the effect button unit 750, the outside of the side cutout 754f of the button lens main body 754a and the outside of the horizontal guide port 766i of the button lower base 766, and the inside of the button frame 752. And a communication space S3 formed between them. In addition, a communication space S4 is provided between the outside of the button unit base 770 in the radial direction and the right reinforcing plate 739a through the space between the outside of the button lower base 766 in the radial direction and the panel-side recess 694b of the operation panel 690. . In addition, a base surrounding portion 730e to which the communication space S4 is connected is provided.

  The communication spaces S3 and S4 and the pedestal surrounding portion 730e are regions that are shielded from the player and are shielded from the outside, so that the fluid does not flow out from the middle of the communication spaces S3 and S4. Therefore, during the game of the player, the player is not distracted by the fluid and does not detract from the interest.

  Further, in such a gaming machine 10, when the volume of the fluid exceeds the capacity of the base surrounding portion 730e, the fluid can flow into the bottom surrounding portion 730a. Therefore, even when the volume of the fluid is large, the fluid does not flow out of the gaming machine or the flow is delayed, so that during the game of the player, the player is distracted by the fluid and enjoys interest. Is not reduced.

  The base 730c in which the base enclosing part 730e described above is formed is a configuration for providing the right reinforcing plate mounting part 731d, and is a part that is unlikely to be damaged or deteriorated by water leakage. Further, the bottom surrounding portion 730 e is a configuration for supporting the button unit base 770. By providing the function of storing the fluid at such a position, even if the fluid is retained inside the gaming machine 10, the gaming ball may be soiled, the circuit board of the gaming machine may be touched, or a member in the gaming area may be used. Can be avoided.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, as described above, the fluid can be flowed into the gaming machine by the flowing means, and the fluid is flowed into the gaming machine by the flowing means by the delaying means. Delay the flow of the fluid. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, since the speed at which the fluid flows into the gaming machine (the interior of the upper plate unit 20) is reduced, the fluid such as water flows into the circuit board (for example, the LED board 767 and the relay board 737). The fluid can be evaporated or dispersed before reaching critical parts such as. Therefore, an important portion inside the gaming machine can be protected from the fluid, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest of the player due to a failure of the gaming machine or the like.

  Note that the above-described effect is similarly exerted on the left side of the upper plate unit 20 (the effect button unit 750).

[Second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant description will be omitted as appropriate.

(Game board)
The gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 35 is a front view (normal gaming state) of the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a front view (a state indicating a specific mode) of the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a front view (specific gaming state) of the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on a front surface of the game board main body 30a.

  At a substantial center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying (variably displaying) a plurality of identification information is arranged. Further, behind the window of the center case 40 and in front of the display device 41, a movable accessory 820, a drop accessory 810, and the like are arranged around the display device 41 when viewed from the front.

  The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to a device having a liquid crystal display, but may be a device having a display such as an EL or CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas (variable display areas 610 and 615) are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and a variable display game are produced in each variable display area. A character (for example, character 826a (FIG. 40)) is displayed. In addition, an image (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  For example, in the center of the display device 41, a change display area 610 displaying a change (↓↓↓) of a decorative special design (large design) is displayed as identification information. On the right side of the display device 41, from the top, in order from the top, the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1, the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660, the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660, the fluctuation display An area 615 is displayed.

  The fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 indicates whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed. If “○”, it is being executed, and if “x”, it is not being executed ( No suspension or suspension). The fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 indicates whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. If “○”, it is being executed, and if “x”, it is not executed. Indicates medium (no hold).

  The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 displays the reserved number (the maximum reserved number is 4) of the special figure 1 variable display game described later. The special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 displays the reserved number (the maximum reserved number is 4) of a special figure 2 variable display game described later. The change display area 615 displays the change (↓↓↓) of the decoration reduction symbol (small symbol) as identification information.

  At the lower part of the display device 41, a hold for displaying a special figure 1 variable display game described later (first start storage) or a hold for a special figure 2 variable display game described later (second start storage) is displayed as a hold display 633. A display section 630a and a reserve digestion area 640 displaying a variation hold display 633a indicating a hold related to the running variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game) are displayed. Note that the hold display 633 and the change hold display 633a are capable of giving a preview effect in which colors, shapes, patterns, and the like are changed and displayed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit.

  A mode display section 674 (first suggestion information) for displaying the effect mode (stage) by character information is displayed on the upper left portion of the display device 41. As the display of the effect mode, an arbitrary word is applied according to the game state. For example, in a normal game state (a state in which the player is not in an advantageous game state), “normal mode” is displayed (FIG. 35). ), "?? mode" is displayed in a specific game state such as a time saving state (FIG. 36), and "tiger mode" is displayed in a special game state (big hit, small hit) (FIG. 37).

  Note that the player operates the staging operation device (the staging button 25 described above), so that an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure change display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or to execute a notice effect in which a result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory is announced in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and if the variable display game is simply referred to as a variable figure display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operation device (effect button 25) during non-execution.

  Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the occurrence probability of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a fluctuation display game is high (probable change state, probability change state), a big hit state (special game state). ), A small hitting game state (small hitting state).

  Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games is executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a winning device or the like including the specific region 86 is provided, and a certain change state is generated when a game ball passes through the specific region 86. If a specific type of jackpot (probably variable jackpot or the like) is won by the jackpot symbol random number, the specific area 86 is opened for a long time and the game ball passes without fail, and after the jackpot is completed, the state can be shifted to the certain change state. In this embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that the probable change state (high probability state) continues until the next big hit occurs.

  The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device 530 into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A return valve 814 and a valve sensor 814a are arranged at the entrance of the game area 32 (the exit of the shooting ball guide passage 33). The return valve 814 is arranged so that the lower end is a fixed end and the upper end is a free end so as to be rotatable, and an urging means (not shown) for urging in a direction to close an entrance of the game area 32 is provided. Installed.

  The return valve 814 rotates in a direction to open the entrance of the game area 32 when the game ball fired from the ball firing device 530 comes into contact, and introduces the game ball into the game area 32. Thereafter, when the game ball separates from the return valve 814, the return valve 814 rotates in the opposite direction by the urging force to close the entrance of the game area 32. This prevents the game ball introduced into the game area 32 from returning to the ball launching device side.

  The valve sensor 814a transmits a detection signal to the game control device 100 each time the return valve 814 rotates in a direction to open the entrance to the game area 32 (or each time it rotates in a direction to close the entrance to the game area 32). I do. The detection signal is used to count the number of launch balls (or the number of out balls) of the game balls. The detection signal may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 (described later) and used for effect control.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and a part of the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In addition, the center case 40 has an inflow port 40a into a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which game balls passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40 and below the stage section 40b, a start winning opening (starting opening 1, first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variable display game is provided. Is provided. For this reason, the game balls rolled on the stage section 40b can easily win the starting winning opening 36. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, but if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, the special handling is held (the maximum number of holdings is 4). In addition, just below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30b for collecting game balls that have not won the winning opening is provided.

  In the gaming area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, a plurality of general winning openings 35 and a general winning opening unit 808 including the collective display device 50 are arranged. The general winning opening unit 808 is also provided with an out opening 30b. Here, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 79) provided in the general winning opening 35. Note that a sticker 815 for decorating the general winning opening unit 808 is attached thereto. The seal 815 will be described later.

  The collective display device 50 (see FIG. 39 (b)) is a display device in which eight LED lamps arranged horizontally are arranged vertically in four stages, and the total number of the LED lamps is 32. The collective display device 50 includes, for example, a first special figure change display unit (special figure 1 display unit 51) configured by, for example, eight LED lamps at the top and displaying a special figure 1 change display game, and a second step from the top. A second special figure change display section (special figure 2 display device 52) configured to display a special figure 2 change display game constituted by eight LED lamps.

  Further, the collective display device 50 includes a variable display unit (general-purpose display device 53) configured by the bottommost fifth to seventh LED lamps from the left and displaying a general-purpose variation display game, and a second-level display from the bottom. The special figure 1 suspension display unit 54, which is constituted by the first and second LED lamps from the left and notifies the number of start (reserve) storage of the special figure 1 variable display game, the third figure from the left of the second row from the bottom And a special figure 2 suspension display unit 55 configured by a fourth LED lamp to notify the number of start (reserve) storage of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Furthermore, the collective display device 50 is configured by the seventh LED lamp from the left in the second row from the bottom, and notifies the user of right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal-hand). A second game state display comprising a first game state display section 57 (first game state indicator) and a rightmost LED lamp in the second tier from the bottom, which lights up when a time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state. A portion 58 (a second game state indicator) and an LED lamp arranged at the lowermost stage and on the rightmost side and indicate that the big hit probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display, probability state display section) and the first to fourth LED lamps from the bottom of the bottom row constitute the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (special fluctuation winning device 38, 39 open / close times, rounds Has a round display section 60 to display the number upper limit value), the.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the center segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). It should be noted that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to the case where they are constituted by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and may be constituted by a 7-segment type display.

  In addition, when performing the fluctuation display, all the LED lamps are turned on and off completely (all LEDs are simultaneously blinking) or cyclically turned on (all the LED lamps are turned on in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals from any one of the LED lamps). Or a predetermined number of LED lamps out of a plurality of LED lamps.

  Also in the general-purpose indicator 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (flashing) in which all the LED lamps constituting the general-purpose display 53 are repeatedly turned on and off. Also, the general figure display 53 can be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  The lamp display device 80 disposed in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 performs a variable display (blinking) as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later) that repeats a lighting display and a non-lighting display. (LED) and a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for informing the number of stored (started) storage of each special figure change display game. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display unit 1 (the top LED) and the lamp display unit 2 (the second LED from the top) blink as a variable display at a predetermined blink cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). While the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display unit 3 (third special figure 1 reserved LED 1 from the top) and the lamp display unit 4 (fourth special figure 1 reserved LED 2 from the top) indicate the special figure 1 according to a combination of the unlit state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. The number of reservations (the first number of stored memories) is displayed. Similarly, the lamp display unit 5 (the fifth special figure 2 reserved LED 1 from the top) and the lamp display unit 6 (the lowest special figure 2 reserved LED 2) are specially indicated by the combination of the unlit state, the lit state, and the blinking state. FIG. 2 Displays the number of suspensions (the number of second start storages). The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds when a big hit occurs. However, in a case other than the state of the big hit (including a case where a reach described later occurs on the display device 41), the display of the number of holds is displayed. Do.

  In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a channel unit 802, a special winning opening unit 800, a general purpose unit 804, and a special winning opening unit 806 are provided in order from the top.

  The flow path unit 802 forms a flow path including the general-purpose starting gate 34, and allows the game ball to flow down to the special winning opening unit 800 regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34. . Here, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 79) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided inside the general-purpose starting gate 34. Then, when the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, the general-purpose variation display game is executed.

  The special winning opening unit 800 includes the general winning opening 35, the special variable winning device 39 (the special winning opening solenoid 39b, the opening / closing door 39c (the blade member 914a in FIG. 72)), the specific area 86, and the like. . In the special winning opening unit 800, the game ball flowing down from the flow path unit 802 wins the general winning opening 35 or flows down the flow path leading to the special variable winning device 39. Here, the special fluctuation prize winning device 39 is normally closed, and causes the general-purpose unit 804 to flow the game balls flowing down the flow path. However, when the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game is the special game state (big hit), or when the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game described later is the special game state (big hit, small hit), It is configured such that the game ball is released for a time and can enter the special variable prize winning device 39 and can enter the specific area 86 with a predetermined probability. Details of the special winning opening unit 800 will be described in a fourth embodiment.

  Note that the game control device 100 can detect the passage (V winning) of the game ball to the specific area 86 via a sensor (specific area switch 72 (V switch, FIG. 72)) or the like. Later, it is determined that the state will shift to the probable change state, and information (a specific area passage command or the like) indicating that there is a V winning is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

  The general-purpose unit 804 forms a flow path that includes the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting opening 2, second starting winning region), and a game ball that does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a large winning opening. It flows down to the unit 806. Here, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 allows the game ball to win by opening the movable member 37b for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 second) when the result of the above-mentioned normal fluctuation display game is a hit. Then, when the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, but if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, the special handling is held (the maximum number of holdings is 4).

  The special winning opening unit 806 forms a flow path that includes the special variable winning device 38 (the special opening solenoid 38 b and the sliding door 38 c), and game balls that do not win the special variable winning device 38. Flows down to the out port 30b immediately below the start winning port 36. Here, the special variable winning device 38 is normally closed, and the game ball does not win. However, when the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special game state (big hit) (or when the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is a special game state (big hit, small hit)), The time is released, and the game ball is in a state in which the special variable winning device 38 can be awarded.

  The RUSH lamp 812 (second lighting means) is disposed above the special winning opening unit 806 and on the left side of the general-purpose unit 804. As the RUSH lamp 812, for example, a lamp capable of full color lighting is applied. The RUSH lamp 812 is controlled by the effect control device 300, and the lighting state (including the color change) changes based on the game state. In particular, the RUSH lamp 812 is lit (blinks) so that, for example, a character “RUSH” floats when a certain change state (a state in which a small hit rush (small hit RUSH) described later can occur) occurs (FIG. 37). ). Here, the characters “↓ RUSH ↓” (or “RUSH”) of the RUSH lamp 812 may be printed on the surface of the RUSH lamp 812. Further, the RUSH lamp 812 may be configured by a plurality of light-emitting bodies (LEDs or the like) arranged so as to form a character of “↓ RUSH ↓” (or “RUSH”). By displaying “↓” beside “RUSH”, it is possible to surely draw attention to the large winning opening unit 806 in which the small hit rush has occurred.

  The movable accessory 820 is an accessory that has an arc shape as a whole and includes an accessory lamp 820a (first light emitting unit), and is movable by being controlled by the effect control device 300 according to a gaming state. In the initial state (normal gaming state), for example, the movable auditorium 820 is arranged at a position covering the left side of the display device 41, as shown in FIG. At this time, the accessory lamp 820a is disposed on the back side of the warp passage 40e, and has a light emitting mode for decorating the warp passage 40e from the back side.

  36 and 37, an upper guide member 954 (FIG. 41) arranged on the left side of the movable auditory piece 820 and a lower guide member 956 arranged below the movable auditory piece 820. It moves so as to draw an arc by sliding along (FIG. 41). The structure of the movable role 820 will be described later.

  As described above, in the arrangement of FIG. 35, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position on the back side of the warp passage 40e and is used for displaying an effect for decorating the warp passage 40e. On the other hand, the accessory lamp 820a moves in accordance with the movement of the movable accessory 820. For example, when the movable accessory 820 moves to the intermediate position as shown in FIG. 36, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged below the display device 41 and used for displaying an effect using the effect button 25 as described later. Further, for example, when the movable accessory 820 moves to the final position as shown in FIG. 37, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at the lower right of the display device 41 as described later, and the variable display of the variable display game and the variable display game (Outlier, small hit or big hit). That is, the accessory lamp 820a moves in accordance with the game state, and performs different purposes with different light emission modes. Note that when the accessory lamp 820a (movable accessory 820) is arranged as shown in FIG. 37, the RUSH lamp 812 is turned on, so that not only the RUSH lamp 812 is turned on but also the position of the accessory lamp 820a (movable accessory 820). Can also indicate a probable change state.

  The drop accessory 810 is an accessory having a longitudinal direction in the left-right direction in an initial state, and a right portion thereof is rotatably supported by a motor and a gear. Therefore, the dropping object 810 is rotatable by driving the motor with the right side as a fixed end and the left side as a free end. When the motor is driven in the forward direction, the left portion of the dropping object 810 overlaps the display device 41. When the motor is driven in the reverse direction, the motor can rotate in the reverse direction and return to the initial state. The motor is controlled by effect control device 300. An opening 810a is formed on the left side of the dropping object 810, and various decorations (see FIG. 40) can be attached to the opening 810a.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the ordinary figure change display game and the special figure change display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from the ball launching device 530 through the launch ball guide passage 33 toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstruction nails, windmills and the like arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening. 36, the normal fluctuation prize device 37, or the special fluctuation prize device 38, 39 is won, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning hole that has won the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 through.

  The general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 79) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the general-purpose change display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number for collision determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the general figure variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure variable display game is already running and the general figure variable display game is not ended, or when the result of the general figure variable display game is When the variable prize device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, if the general-purpose starting storage number is less than the upper limit number, the storage number is added (+1).

  The hit figure starting memory stores a hit determination random value for determining a hit / fall of the hit picture variation display game, and when the hit determination random value matches the judgment value, the hit figure variation display is performed. The game results in a specific result mode (specific result).

  The general figure change display game is executed on the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is constituted by an LED that indicates a hit in a lighting state as normal identification information (general figure) and indicates a deviation in a non-lighting state, and blinks the LED to change the normal identification information. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined change display time has elapsed.

  If the ordinary figure random number value extracted at the time of passing through the ordinary figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary figure display 53 stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, by driving the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 79), the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 second), and the game ball is transferred to the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 79) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 79). The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

  At the time of detecting the winning prize ball of the special figure change display game, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, each change pattern random number, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in a special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The stored number of the special figure start prize storage is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display section 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display section 55 for informing the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 change display game (first special figure change display game) and the special figure 2 change display game (second special figure change display game) are identified by the identification information (the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52). This is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying the special symbols and special symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous fluctuating machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be independently (simultaneously) executed. If a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (in this embodiment, there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result. I do. If a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss.

  If a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display After the small hit operation regarding the game, the suspended special figure 1 variable display game can be resumed.

  In addition, when a game ball wins in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by right-handing in the normal game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, but basically fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes). Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this time, the game is forcibly stopped and stopped.

  The display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like) are varied and displayed in correspondence with each special figure variation display game.

  In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special design (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers or the like is left (first special design), right (second special design), middle (third special design). This is performed by starting the variable display (scroll display) in the order of the special symbols, sequentially stopping the symbols that fluctuate after a predetermined time, and displaying the result of the special symbol variable display game. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of a character are performed to enhance interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as the other decorative special symbols (identification information), the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 repeat the lighting display and the unlit display (flashing) to perform the fourth special symbol (the blinking). (Fourth symbol) fluctuates. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops at a predetermined time after the start, with "off" in the case of a loss, and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit. In the display device 41, the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) is displayed as the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2.

  As for the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display regions, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in a device or a display area. In addition, the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may both be in the running state (running state) at the same time.

  If the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived based on the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numerals such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

  At this time, the special fluctuation winning devices 38 and 39 are changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (see FIG. 79). You. In other words, the special winning opening provided in the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 opens greatly for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which time the player can acquire many game balls. Granted.

  If the winning of the game ball to the starting winning prize port 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the small hit value), the result of the special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

  At this time, the special fluctuation winning device 38 and the special fluctuation winning device 39 open the special winning opening from a closed state for a predetermined short time by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 79). Converted to state. In addition, the total opening time of the special winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state). Value (number of acquired balls) is small. In addition, in both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state, and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

  In the present embodiment, in the small hit state, only the special variable winning device 38 is operated and only the lower large winning opening is opened, but in the small hit state, both of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened. It is good also as a structure which operates and opens both the lower winning a prize port and the upper winning prize port.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the probable change state, a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which a small hit frequently occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, in the small hit rush, the special variable winning device 38 is opened at a high frequency. Note that a configuration is also possible in which a small hit RUSH (rush) state is set even in a time saving state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the specific flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. Is used as a term having the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened by setting a big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, a special hit prize is set by setting a small hit flag. The variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened.

  After the end of the big hit state, if there is a V prize during the big hit state, the state shifts to the probable change state, and if there is no V prize, the state shifts to the normal game state. On the other hand, after the end of the small hit state (shorter than the big hit state), the game state returns to the original gaming state before the start of the small hit state. In the big hit state, the big hit probability is low, but in the small hit state, the big hit probability before the start of the small hit state is maintained (the small hit state does not change the probability state). Therefore, the small hit rush state where small hits frequently occur continues from the start of the probability change state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure change display game becomes the big hit result), and the big hit probability throughout the small hit rush state Is maintained at a high probability (probability variation state).

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure change display games are not executed at the same time. It is set as follows.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  Also, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch. 43 (lower win switch 38a, upper win switch 39a, FIG. 79) and specific area switch 72 (V switch, FIG. 72, FIG. 79) are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and metal is close to the coils. Then, a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes is used (FIG. 79). In addition, a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like includes a machine. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used (FIG. 79).

  The details of the game control related to the game (variable display game and the like) and the effect control related to the effect, and the details of the game control device 100 that executes the game control and the effect control device 300 that executes the effect control are based on block diagrams and flowcharts. This will be described later in a fifth embodiment.

[Arrangement of accessory lamps, lighting modes of accessory lamps and RUSH lamps]
As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, in the present embodiment, the mode display section 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 displayed on the display device 41 are substantially diagonal lines of the game board 30 (from the upper left to the lower right). The lines are arranged so as to be aligned on a virtual line 822 (broken line in FIG. 37) which forms a forward line. In particular, in the special fluctuation winning device 38, a sliding opening / closing door 38c that opens and closes the special winning opening is arranged on a virtual line 822 (FIG. 37). The return valve 814 is arranged so that at least its tip overlaps the virtual line 822 by rotating.

  The accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position apart from the imaginary line 822 in the normal game state (FIG. 35) and the specific game state (excluding the probable change state) (FIG. 36). At this time, the RUSH lamp 812 is basically turned off. In the normal game state and the specific game state (excluding the probable change state), the accessory lamp 820a may be turned on for an effect as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the normal gaming state, the accessory lamp 820a lights up based on the control of the effect control device 300 to decorate the warp passage 40e. When a game ball wins, a variable display game described later is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 36, when a specific game state (excluding a probable change state) such as a time saving state occurs, a mode display section 674 of “?? mode” is displayed in the upper left portion of the display device 41, and a movable character 820 moves to an intermediate position so that the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position substantially at the center of the lower portion of the display device 41. In addition, the accessory lamp 820a and the display device 41 are provided for an effect by the effect control device 300.

  For example, in the central part of the display device 41, a display “turn off by button operation” and a display “PUSH” displayed below the display are surrounded by an ellipse. Information 618a is displayed. At this time, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged at a position directly below the operation promotion information 618a, and all the LED lamps (seven) constituting the accessory lamp 820a are turned on as an initial state. At a position between the operation promotion information 618a of the display device 41 and the accessory lamp 820a, remaining number information 618b indicating the remaining number of LED lamps to be turned off, such as "seven more", is displayed.

  Each time the player presses the effect button 25 in the above state, the LED lamps constituting the accessory lamp 820a are turned off one by one, and the display indicating that the remaining number indicated by the remaining number information 618b is reduced by one is performed. . Then, when all the LED lamps are turned off, an arbitrary effect using the display device 41, the accessory lamp 820a, the upper effect unit 40c, the side effect unit 40d, the falling accessory 810, and the like is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the probability change state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur), the accessory lamp 820 a is arranged so as to be aligned on the virtual line 822. At this time, the RUSH lamp 812 emits light (indicative light emission) to indicate that it is in a probable change state (a state in which a small hit rush can occur). At this time, the accessory lamp 820 a (movable accessory 820) indicates a certain change state according to its operation position. However, the positive change state (a state in which a small hit rush can be generated) is performed by the same light emission mode as the RUSH lamp 812. May suggest.

  When a game ball wins the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a fluctuation display game using the accessory lamp 820a is started (FIG. 38). When the result of the variable display game is a small hit, the accessory lamp 820a is stopped and displayed, for example, the RUSH lamp 812 blinks during the small hit state. When a big hit occurs, the accessory lamp 820a is stopped and displayed, for example, the RUSH lamp 812 emits a different color during the big hit state than in the case of the positive change state. For example, the RUSH lamp 812 emits blue light in a probable state, emits yellow light in a big hit state, or sequentially emits light in seven colors (rainbow colors) of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. .

  Note that the RUSH lamp 812 and the accessory lamp 820a may be constantly turned on (either of the same emission color, the same system (similar) emission color, or the completely different emission color) as long as the probable change state is maintained. However, the light emission color may be changed according to a predetermined time interval (for example, the timing at which the effect control device 300 receives the detection signal transmitted from the valve sensor 814a).

  In the probable change state, at least the accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 are arranged on the imaginary line 822, and the player receives the special winning opening unit 806 that can win with a small hit (or a big hit). The gaze is easier to turn.

  At this time, in the display device 41, in addition to the mode display unit 674 "tiger mode", a suggestive light emission regarding the certainty change state of the RUSH lamp 812 and the accessory lamp 820a is displayed on the virtual line 822. Thereby, the player recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822 by the mode display unit 674, the accessory lamp 820a, and the RUSH lamp 812, and the line of sight is easily directed to the special winning opening unit 806 arranged on the virtual line 822.

  Further, when the small winning state is opened with the small hit state, the effect image 617 (specific image) is displayed on the virtual line 822. The effect image 617 is applied with, for example, a moving image (or a still image) showing a movement in which sparks scatter intensely in a direction along the virtual line 822, and is displayed in conjunction with the opening time of the special winning opening 38, for example. . Thereby, the player recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822 by the mode display section 674, the effect image 617, the accessory lamp 820a, and the RUSH lamp 812, and the line of sight is directed to the special winning opening unit 806 arranged on the virtual line 822. It is easier to turn.

  Further, on the display device 41, an arrow image 619 (second suggestion information) indicating the direction in which the special winning opening unit 806 is arranged is displayed on the virtual line 822 in conjunction with the display of the effect image 617. The arrow image 619 may be a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image moving toward the special winning opening unit 806 along the virtual line 822. This allows the player's line of sight to be directed to the special winning opening unit 806 without fail.

  In addition, the RUSH lamp 812 may be arranged on the opposite side of the accessory lamp 820a across the large winning opening unit 806. That is, the RUSH lamp 812 may be arranged on the virtual line 822 on the lower right of the special winning opening unit 806, and the special winning opening unit 806 may be sandwiched between the accessory lamp 820a and the RUSH lamp 812. Thus, the accessory lamp 820a and the RUSH lamp 812 are turned on, so that the special winning opening unit 806 sandwiched therebetween can be noticed. In addition, the special winning opening unit 806 and the RUSH lamp 812 may be integrated, so that the special winning opening unit 806 can be noticed by turning on the RUSH lamp 812.

[Variable display mode of accessory lamp]
FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram showing a lighting mode of the accessory lamp 820a. FIG. 38 (a) shows a lighting mode in which a lighting portion goes around when fluctuating, and FIG. 38 (b) shows two lighting states alternately when fluctuating. FIG. 38 (c) shows a lighting mode in which the lighting portion changes so as to draw a figure 8 when it fluctuates.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the accessory lamp 820a includes an LED lamp 823a disposed at the center and a plurality (six in this embodiment) of LED lamps 823b disposed around the LED lamp 823a. It is preferable that the LED lamps 823a and 823b be capable of full color lighting.

  As a display pattern of the variable display game, for example, as shown in FIG. 38A, one of the plurality of LED lamps 823b is turned on first, the LED lamp 823b is turned off, and the clockwise direction (or The adjacent LED lamps 823b are turned on (in a counterclockwise direction), and by repeating this, the surroundings of the LED lamps 823a are displayed by cyclic lighting. At this time, the number of circulations may be one or more. When the result mode of the variable display game is out of order (or may be a small hit), only the LED lamp 823a is turned on and all the LED lamps 823b are turned off. On the other hand, when the result mode of the variable display game is a small hit (may be a miss), the LED lamp 823a is turned off and all the LED lamps 823b are turned on. Furthermore, when the result mode of the variable display game is a big hit, all of the LED lamps 823a and 823b are turned on, or are turned on and off in synchronization with each other.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 38B, the variable display game may be displayed by alternately lighting the LED lamps 823a and 823b alternately. Note that the result mode is the same as that in the case of FIG. Then, when performing the next variable display game, all the LED lamps 823a and 823b may be turned off for a predetermined short time so that the start and end of the variable display game may be clear.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the variable display game may be displayed by cyclic lighting in which the lighting position is moved so as to draw a figure 8 horizontally around the LED lamp 823a. Note that the result mode is the same as that in the case of FIG.

  Note that a full-color LED can be used for the LED lamps 823a and 823b. In this case, the above-mentioned cyclic lighting is not the turning on / off of the LED lamps 823a and 823b, but the state in which all of the LED lamps 823a and 823b are turned on. , A lighting mode in which a specific emission color circulates may be adopted. For example, one LED lamp is turned on with a yellow light emission color, all the remaining LED lamps are turned on with a blue light emission color, and the LED lights 823a and 823b are turned on so that the yellow light moves to the next LED. It is good also as a lighting mode which carries out cyclic lighting between.

  Further, in the case of the above-mentioned alternate lighting, a lighting mode in which two different emission colors are alternately emitted by the LED lamps 823a and 823b may be adopted. For example, a lighting mode in which the state in which the LED lamp 823a is lit in the blue light emission color and the state in which the LED lamps 823b are all lit in the yellow light emission color may be alternately switched.

  Further, in the result mode, when the LED lamp 823a and the LED lamp 823b are all turned on and the LED lamp 823a is off, the LED lamp 823a is turned on with a specific emission color and the LED lamp 823b is emitted with a light emission color other than the specific emission color. It is sufficient to apply a lighting mode in which the LED lamp 823b is turned on with a specific light emission color and the LED lamp 823a is turned on with a light emission color other than the specific light emission color in the case of lighting and a small hit. For example, in the case of a miss, the LED lamp 823a lights up in a yellow light emission color and the LED lamp 823b lights up in a blue light emission color, and in the case of a small hit, the LED lamp 823a lights up in a blue light emission color. The lighting mode may be such that 823b is lit in yellow emission color.

  Also, the fluctuation display game may be played not only in the probability change state shown in FIG. 37 but also in the normal game state shown in FIG. 35 and the time reduction state (specific mode state) shown in FIG. The execution time (variation time) of the display game is set shorter than the execution time in the normal gaming state. Thus, for example, when a small hit rush is occurring, the variable display game is quickly performed to enhance the rush feeling, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The execution time (shortest fluctuation time, longest fluctuation time, average fluctuation time) is, for example, (1.2 seconds, 2 seconds, 1.6 seconds) in the normal gaming state, (0.5 seconds, (1 second, 0.75 seconds), and in the probable change state (small hit rush state), (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 0.75 seconds). The longest fluctuation time in the normal game state may be, for example, 10 minutes in the case of a long fluctuation (described later) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In the case of reach, the longest fluctuation time may be extended to several tens of seconds.

[Seal to decorate general winning opening unit]
FIG. 39 (a) is a schematic diagram of the general winning opening unit 808 and the collective display device 50, FIG. 39 (b) is a detailed view of the collective displaying device 50, and FIG. FIG. 39D is a schematic diagram of a seal 815 to be decorated, and FIG. 39D is a schematic diagram of position information 819a and 819b and related information 817 displayed on the seal 815.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the general winning opening unit 808 (unit) includes a plurality of general winning openings 35 (winning openings), an out opening 30b, a collective display device 50, and a lower left corner of the game area 32. (To the left of the start winning port 36). In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 35 is incorporated in the unit, but the starting winning opening 36 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 may be incorporated.

  In addition, the general winning opening unit 808 has a front wall 808a that covers the general winning opening 35 and the out opening 30b, and a lower portion that follows the boundary of the game area 32.

  The front wall 808a may be transparent or opaque. In the case of opacity, the portion overlapping the collective display device 50 is made transparent so that the collective display device 50 can be viewed. A seal 815 (decorative portion) for decorating the general winning opening unit 808 is attached to the front wall 808a.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the outer shape of the seal 815 is formed following the shape of the front wall 808a. The seal 815 may be transparent or opaque. In the case where the seal 815 is opaque, a transparent portion 815a (or an opening) may be provided at a position overlapping the collective display device 50. Note that, even when the seal 815 is transparent, it is preferable to provide an opening in a portion overlapping with the collective display device 50. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the collective display device 50 becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the reflection of light on the surface of the seal 815. Further, it is possible to prevent dust from adhering between the seal 815 (adhesive portion) and the collective display device 50.

  The seal 815 displays position information 819a and 819b (general winning opening position information) indicating the position of the general winning opening 35 and position information 818a (out opening position information) indicating the position of the out opening 30b.

  As shown in FIG. 39D, the position information 819a, 819b has, for example, a form in which a rectangular frame and the character “IN” are arranged inside the rectangular frame, and the position where the character “IN” is arranged is generally The winning opening 35 is shown. The position information 818a also has a form in which, for example, a rectangular frame and the character “OUT” are arranged inside the rectangular frame, and indicates that the position where the character “OUT” is arranged is the out port 30b. The area within the frame of the position information 818a, 819a, 819b may be transparent or opaque except for characters.

  On the sticker 815, related information 817 (round information) listing the display modes of the number of rounds of the big hit (duration of the big hit, the upper limit of the number of rounds) displayed by the round display unit 60 is displayed. The related information 817 displays a rectangular frame in which lighting modes of 16 rounds (probable change), 16 rounds (normal), 8 rounds, and 2 rounds are arranged in a horizontal line from the left.

  Corresponding to this, as shown in FIG. 39B, emphasis information for emphasizing (indicating) that the round display unit 60 is provided at a position corresponding to the round display unit 60 in the transparent portion 815a of the seal 815. 815b is displayed. The emphasis information 815b may have a rectangular frame shape surrounding the round display portion 60 as shown in FIG. 39B, or may have an underline shape drawn below the round display portion 60. Further, an arrow 815c connecting the emphasis information 815b and the related information 817 is displayed on the sticker 815, suggesting that the emphasis information 815b and the related information 817 correspond. Therefore, the player can clearly determine which round this time is by comparing the lighting information displayed in the frame of the emphasis information 815b with the related information 817.

  In addition, patterns 816a, 816b, and 816c that decorate the entire seal 815 are displayed on the seal 815. The patterns 816a, 816b, 816c have, for example, a star-shaped frame shape. Each pattern can be arbitrarily displayed as long as visibility of the collective display device 50 and the related information 817 can be ensured. For example, the pattern 816 a overlapping the related information 817 is displayed in a manner that a part thereof is covered by the reference information 817. The pattern 816a overlapping the transparent part 815a is displayed such that the part overlapping the transparent part 815a (the batch display device 50) disappears. The pattern 816b is displayed on the position information 818a at a position that does not overlap with the character “OUT”. The pattern 816c is displayed on the position information 819a, 819b at a position where the character "IN" is arranged inside.

  The sticker 815 of the present embodiment displays winning opening position information (position information 819a, 819b) and related information 817, so that the player can watch. In addition, since the related information 817 is displayed on the sticker 815, the contents of the special game state can be easily understood.

  In the seal 815 of the present embodiment, the related information 817 indicating the lighting mode of the round display unit 60 is displayed on the seal 815 for decorating the general winning opening unit 808. Thus, the general winning opening unit 808 can be applied to other models by applying the seal 815 reflecting the related information 817 to other models having different related information 817. 808 can be improved in versatility.

  By the way, since the general winning opening unit 808 is arranged in the game area 32, a change in the model (changing specifications and a motif of the model) requires a change in the seal for decorating the general winning opening unit 808. It is indispensable to change to a seal that matches the object and board design. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the number of rounds of the collective display device 50 is displayed as related information 817 on a sticker 815 that decorates the general winning opening unit 808. Thereby, by changing the seal 815, both the display of the number of rounds and the decoration (the patterns 816a, 816b, and 816c are different decorations other than the star (☆)) can be changed together. In addition, the general winning opening unit 808 can be reused only by changing the seal 815 while keeping the structure of the winning opening unit 808 as it is, and cost reduction can be achieved. Note that the collective display device 50 may not be mounted on the general winning opening unit 808, and even in this case, the related information 817 is displayed on the seal 815 so that the player can watch the seal 815. .

  More specifically, for example, (1) when using a model having the same motif and different specifications (the number of rounds is small, for example, only two) including the same collective display device 50 as it is, The winning opening unit 808 is used: In this case, since four LED lamps indicating the number of rounds are not necessary, for example, a seal (not shown, for example, a black seal) that makes the left two invisible (hard to see) is used. You may paste it from above and reuse it. As a result, the common winning opening unit 808 can be used in common, leading to cost reduction. In addition, two LED lamps may emit light only when the power is turned on so that they cannot be visually recognized (they are difficult to visually recognize), so that the two LED lamps may function as LED lamps for checking whether power is supplied. At this time, at least the red light emission is made to be slightly visible in the LED lamp which has become difficult to view due to a seal (not shown).

  Further, for example, when the two LED lamps are made invisible as in (2) and (1), the emphasis information 815b for emphasizing the number of rounds (for example, when the shape is a rectangular frame shape (□)) is also a black seal. (Not shown) so that the LED lamp to be emphasized is the right two LED lamps: the emphasis information 815b is displayed in a state where the left half is missing. You can emphasize the remaining right half without emphasizing.

[Arrangement of movable and falling objects in each mode]
FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the accessory unit and the dropped accessory unit, the display mode of the display device, and the like. FIG. 40 (a-1) shows an example of the normal game state, and FIG. FIG. 40B shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40A, and FIG. 40B shows an example in which a specific mode is suggested. 40 (b-2) shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (b-1), and FIG. 40 (c-1) shows an example in the case of the probable change state. c-2) shows an example in which the falling accessory unit operates in the state of FIG. 40 (c-1).

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a-1), in the normal gaming state (initial state), the movable auditorium 820 is arranged so as to cover the left side of the display device 41 as an initial position, and the falling auditorium 810 is placed on the display device 41. A mode display section 674 composed of characters “normal mode” is displayed at the upper left position of the display device 41 so as to cover a part of the upper side. Also, for example, there is no reservation in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 are displayed as "x" (variable display game is not executed). The number-of-reserves display section 660 in FIG. 2 and the number-of-reserves-number display section 660 are “0”, and a stop symbol “123” is displayed in the variable display area 615. Note that a configuration in which the mode display unit 674 is not displayed in the normal gaming state is also possible.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (a-2), for example, when the variable display game of the special figure 1 (the variable display area 610 is omitted) is started, the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1 becomes “○” (special). The variable design game of FIG. 1 is being executed), the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 is displayed as “x” (the variable display game of the special figure 2 is not executed), and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 displays “1”. "Is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660, and the identification information is variably displayed in the variability display area 615.

  At this time, the falling role object 810 falls (rotates by a predetermined angle) with the execution of the variable display game (or with the occurrence of the reach). However, the falling role 810 does not interfere (collide) with the movable role 820. In addition, the dropping object 810 covers the character 826a displayed on the display device 41. However, an opening 810a is formed in the dropping object 810 so that the character 826a can be visually recognized from the opening 810a. When the result of the variable display game is lost, for example, the dropping object 810 returns to the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (b-1), when the mode display unit 674 is in a specific game state such as a time saving state such that the word “?? mode” is displayed, the accessory lamp 820a is positioned below the display device 41. The movable role 820 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position so as to be arranged at the center front. As described above, when the movable role 820 moves, the movable role 820 does not interfere with (collide with) the falling role 810. In addition, a specific display 826b including, for example, the word “heat” is displayed at the upper center of the display device 41 for the purpose of increasing attention to “?? mode”. A lens 810b (convex lens or Fresnel lens) is fitted into the opening 810a of the dropping object 810.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-2), the dropping object 810 falls as described above. At this time, the lens 810b overlaps with the specific display 826b and enlarges the character of "heat". Note that, for example, when the specific gaming state ends, the movable auditorium 820 and the falling auditorium 810 return to their initial positions. Note that the operation prompting information 618a (FIG. 36) may be applied instead of the specific display 826b, and the lens 810b may display the operation prompting information 618a in an enlarged manner so as to prompt a button operation.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (c-1), in the case of the probable change state, the mode display unit 674 displays the word “tiger mode”, the RUSH lamp 812 is lit, and the right-hand command for “right-hand” is given. The hitting instruction display 620 is displayed at a position on the right side of the display device 41. In addition, the movable accessory 820 moves from the intermediate position (or the initial position) to the final position so that the accessory lamp 820a is disposed at a position on the lower right side of the display device 41 and adjacent to the RUSH lamp 812. I have. The final position may be the maximum position at which the movable role 820 can move farthest from the initial position. In this way, when the movable role 820 moves, the movable role 820 does not interfere with (collide with) the falling role 810. Also, at the final position of the movable accessory 820, the accessory lamp 820a is arranged so as to be aligned on a virtual line 822 (dashed line in FIG. 37) where the mode display unit 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 are arranged. Have been.

  In addition, a character 826a (which may be different from the character 826a in FIG. 40A-1) is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41 for the purpose of increasing attention to the “tiger mode” and the like. A light guide plate 810c is fitted into the opening 810a of the dropping object 810, and the light guide plate 801a is a sunglass (or another type) figure that can be visually recognized by reflecting light from the light source of the light guide plate 810c. 827. Here, as described above, the mode display unit 674, the accessory lamp 820a, and the RUSH lamp 812 are arranged on the same straight line (the virtual line 822 in FIG. 37).

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (c-2), the dropping object 810 falls in the same manner as described above as an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. At this time, the light guide plate 810c overlaps the character 826a, and the graphic 827 overlaps the "eyes" of the character 826a, thereby forming a display mode as if the character 826a is wearing sunglasses. That is, one display content (character) is formed by combining the display content displayed on the display device 41 and the display content displayed on the falling accessory 810. Note that, for example, when an effect with a high degree of expectation of a big hit ends, the movable auditorium 820 and the falling auditorium 810 each return to the initial position, but the movable auditorium 820 is maintained at the final position.

  When the probable change state ends and the normal game state is reached, the movable auditory product 820 returns to the initial position. On the other hand, even if the special figure change display game becomes a small hit and shifts to the small hit state during the probable change state, the small hit state ends in a short time, so that the movable auditory product 820 may be maintained at the final position. It is suitable. Also, if the special figure change display game becomes a big hit during the probable change state and the probable change state ends and shifts to the big hit state (special game state), the movable auditory character 820 sets the number of rounds of the big hit (the upper limit of the number of rounds). The value may be returned to the initial position if the value is large, or may be maintained at the final position if the number of rounds per hit is small.

  In addition, the present invention is not limited to the above, and when the expectation of the big hit of the variable display game is high (that is, under predetermined conditions), the movable accessory 820 is vibrated, and the accessory lamp 820a is in a certain change state. Alternatively, it may deviate from the same straight line (the virtual line 822 in FIG. 37) where the mode display section 674, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 are arranged. Further, the falling role 810 may be lengthened so that the light guide plate 810c and the character 826a are arranged on the virtual line 822 in FIG. 37 when the falling role 810 falls.

  In any of the above modes, the movable character 820 and the falling character 810 do not interfere with each other, the right-handed instruction display 620, the fourth symbol 671 of the special figure 1, and the fourth symbol 672 of the special figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number display section 660, the special figure 2 reservation number display section 660, and the variable display area 615 are not hidden by the movable auditorium 820 or the falling auditorium 810, and are visible. However, the display position of the mode display unit 674 can be changed depending on the gaming state and the states of the movable auditors 820 and the drop auditors 810, and may overlap with the movable auditors 820 or the drop auditors 810. In addition, although the specific mode 826b and the character 826a are displayed on the display device 41 and then the drop role 810 is dropped, the specific mode 826b and the character 826a are displayed on the display device 41 after the drop role 810 is dropped. May be displayed.

[Structure of movable character]
FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the movable accessory 820. FIG. The movable accessory 820 (accessory unit) of this embodiment includes a movable accessory main body 950, a base member 952 for attaching the movable accessory 820 to the game board 30 (not shown in FIG. 41), and a movable accessory main body. An upper guide member 954 that guides the upper part of the decorative member 950 (decorative member 960), and a lower guide member 956 that guides the lower part of the movable accessory main body 950 (the decorative member 960).

  The movable main part main body 950 has an upper movable part 970 movable in the vertical direction and a lower movable part 982 movable in the horizontal direction. In addition, the movable accessory main body 950 includes an upper slide guide member 976 that defines a movable range of the upper movable portion 970 and a lower slide guide base member 978 (a lower slide guide member 979) that defines a movable range of the lower movable portion 982. It has an L-shaped outer shape by an upper slide guide member 976 and a lower slide guide base member 978 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 42).

  The movable accessory main body 950 has a decoration member 960 that is rotatably attached to the upper movable portion 970 and the lower movable portion 982 and operates as a link mechanism between the upper movable portion 970 and the lower movable portion 982. . The decorative member 960 includes a guide member 964a (pin) that contacts the upper guide member 954 and a guide member 964b (pin) that contacts the lower guide member 956.

  The base member 952 has a vertical portion 952a extending vertically and connected to an upper slide guide member 976 and the like, and a horizontal portion 952b extending horizontally and attached to a lower slide guide base member 978. It has an L-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front.

  The upper guide member 954 is a member having a vertically extending guide surface 954a that contacts the guide member 964a. The lower guide member 956 is a member including a guide surface 956a extending in the left-right direction and in contact with the guide member 964b. The guide surface 954a and the guide surface 956a are arranged so as to be at the same position in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10, and have a curved surface shape such that the guide surface 954a and the guide surface 956a form one curved surface as described later. (See FIG. 45).

  Boss-shaped screw holes 978a (two places) are arranged in the lower slide guide base member 978, and the lower guide member 956 is connected to a position facing the screw hole (indicated by a broken line in the drawing. Are similarly shown), through holes 956b (two locations) are arranged, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the insertion hole 956b and screwed into the screw hole 978a to thereby form the movable accessory main body 950 and the lower guide member. 956 is connected. A boss-shaped screw hole 954b is arranged below the upper guide member 954, and an insertion hole (not shown) is arranged at a position corresponding to the screw hole 954b of the lower guide member 956, and a screw is inserted into the insertion hole. The upper guide member 954 and the lower guide member 956 are connected by inserting (not shown) and screwing into the screw hole 954b.

  Here, the decoration member 960 changes its inclination angle while sliding along the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979 as described later. However, the decoration member 960 is disposed at a position different from the guide surface 954a and the guide surface 956a in the front-rear direction, and does not interfere with the guide surface 954a and the guide surface 956a even when the decoration member 960 moves.

  FIG. 42 is a detailed exploded perspective view of the movable accessory 820. As shown in FIG. 42, the movable accessory main body 950 includes a decoration member 960, an upper movable portion 970, a lower movable portion 982, and the like.

  The decoration member 960 includes a decoration base member 961, an LED board 962, and a decoration front plate 963. The decoration member 960 has a form in which the LED board 962 is accommodated from the opening of the decoration base member 961 and the opening of the decoration base member 961 is closed by the decoration front plate 963. 963 forms the outer shape of the decorative member 960.

  The decoration base member 961 has a housing portion 961a that can house the LED board 962. A rotating shaft 961b rotatably supported by a bearing portion 970b described below is disposed above the back surface of the housing portion 961a, and a rotating shaft 961c rotatably supported by a bearing portion 982a described below on the lower side. Is arranged.

  In addition, a support portion 961d (a dowel hole) that supports the guide member 964a is disposed above the decoration base member 961, and a support portion 961e (a dowel hole) that supports the guide member 964b is also disposed below.

  The guide member 964a has a pin shape whose base end is fitted into the support portion 961d, and the side surface of the pin contacts the guide surface 954a and is slidable with respect to the guide surface 954a (FIG. 41). Similarly, the guide member 964b has a pin shape whose base end is fitted into the support portion 961e, and the side surface of the pin is in contact with the guide surface 956a and is slidable with respect to the guide surface 956a (FIG. 41). .

  In another embodiment, the guide member 964a has a shaft (a dowel) fitted into the support portion 961d and a roller rotatably supported by the shaft (a dowel), and the roller is a guide surface 954a. And can roll (slide) with respect to the guide surface 954a (FIG. 41). Similarly, the guide member 964b has a shaft (a dowel) that is fitted into the support portion 961e, and a roller that is rotatably supported by the shaft (a dowel). Rolling (sliding) is possible with respect to the guide surface 956a (FIG. 41).

  The LED substrate 962 has a large number of LED lamps 962a arranged on the entire surface on the side of the decoration front plate 963, and a part of the LED lamp 962a is an LED lamp 823a (FIG. 38) of the accessory lamp 820a and an LED lamp. 823b (FIG. 38).

  The decoration front plate 963 is made of, for example, a translucent material as a whole, and can transmit light from the LED lamps disposed on the LED substrate 962 to some extent. In addition, a window 963a (opening or transparent portion) is formed at a position of the decoration front plate 963 facing the accessory lamp 820a (the LED lamp 823a and the LED lamp 823b), and the accessory lamp 820a is formed from the window 963a. Can be visually recognized with certainty.

  The upper movable portion 970 includes an upper slide guide member 976, a rack gear member 967, and a base guide member 966 as members fixed to the base member 952. The upper movable portion 970 includes a drive source 968, an upper movable portion main body 970a, a relay movable substrate 972, a wiring guard member 974, a relay movable substrate pressing member 971, and the like as members movable in the vertical direction.

  The upper slide guide 976 includes a rail 976a extending vertically and a slider 976b sliding along the longitudinal direction of the rail 976a. The rail 976a is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 976c respectively communicating with a plurality of screw holes 952c formed in the vertical portion 952a. A screw (not shown) is inserted into each insertion hole 976c, and the screw is inserted into the screw hole 952c. The rail 976a is fixed to the vertical portion 952a by screwing.

  The rack gear member 967 is a member extending in the vertical direction, and is arranged so that a linear gear 967a faces a pinion gear 968a described later. The rack gear member 967 has insertion holes 967b through which screws (not shown) are inserted at a plurality of different positions (four positions) in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, in the vertical portion 952a, a plurality of boss-shaped screw holes 952d formed at different positions in the left-right direction from the insertion holes 976c are arranged. The screw hole 952d communicates with the insertion hole 967b one-to-one. Therefore, the rack gear member 967 is configured such that a screw (not shown) is inserted into the insertion hole 967b in a state where the insertion hole 967b and the screw hole 952d communicate with each other, and a screw (not shown) is screwed into the screw hole 952d. 952a.

  The base guide member 966 is a member that extends in the up-down direction, and slides when the upper movable portion main body 970a (sliding portion 970d) abuts. The base guide member 966 has insertion holes 966a at both ends in the longitudinal direction for inserting screws (not shown). On the other hand, a pair of boss-shaped screw holes 952e is provided at the mounting position of the base portion 966 of the vertical portion 952a (a position different from the mounting position of the upper slide guide 976 and the rack gear member 967) (the lower screw holes are not shown). Are located. Therefore, the base guide member 966 is vertically inserted by inserting a screw (not shown) into the insertion hole 966a with the insertion hole 966a and the screw hole 952e communicating with each other, and screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw hole 952e. It is fixed to the part 952a.

  The upper movable section main body 970a is integrated with the bearing section 970b and the mounting section 970c. The bearing portion 970b rotatably supports the rotating shaft 961b attached to the decoration base member 961. The attachment portion 970c is attached to the slider 976b of the upper slide guide member 976. As a result, the upper movable portion main body 970a moves up and down in accordance with the sliding operation of the slider 976b. In addition, the sliding portion 970d is in contact with the surface of the base guide member 966 on the front surface side of the gaming machine 10, and is slidable with respect to the base guide member 966 in the vertical direction.

  A drive source 968 (motor) including a pinion gear 968a is attached to the upper movable portion main body 970. The driving source 968 is fixed to the upper movable portion main body 970 by being screwed (at two places) to the upper movable portion main body 970.

  The drive source 968 is configured to rotationally drive a circular pinion gear 968a, and the pinion gear 968a is engaged (engages) with the gear 967a of the rack gear member 967. Therefore, when the driving source 968 is driven, the pinion gear 968a rotates and moves without sliding along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rack gear member 967, so that the upper movable portion main body 970 moves in the vertical direction.

  At this time, the slider 976b attached to the upper movable portion main body 970 slides vertically according to the longitudinal direction of the rail 976a, and the sliding portion 970d of the upper movable portion main body 970 comes into contact with the base guide member 966 and slides vertically. I do. Accordingly, since the upper movable portion main body 970 is in a two-point support state by the rail 976a and the base guide member 966 located at different positions, the displacement other than the vertical direction is limited, and the upper movable portion main body 970 shakes in the horizontal direction (front-back direction, left-right direction). (The pinion gear 968a does not fall off the gear 967a) and can move in the vertical direction. Note that, for example, when the drive source 968 is driven in the normal rotation, the upper movable portion main body 970 is lowered, and when the drive source 968 is driven in the reverse rotation, the upper movable portion main body 970 is raised.

  Further, a relay movable substrate 972 (a wiring guard member 974 and a relay movable substrate pressing member 971) is attached to the upper movable portion main body 970. The relay movable board 972 is electrically connected to, for example, the effect control device 300, the drive source 968, and the LED board 962 (the accessory lamp 820a), and generates a drive signal based on a signal transmitted from the effect control device 300. 968, and a signal representing the lighting pattern of the LED lamp is transmitted to the LED board 962 (the accessory lamp 820a).

  As a mounting member of the relay movable substrate 972, a wiring guard member 974 and a relay movable substrate pressing member 971 are used. The relay movable board holding member 971 sandwiches the relay movable board 972 from the width direction of the relay movable board 972 together with the wiring guard member 974, and is screwed to the wiring guard member 974 with the relay movable board 972 sandwiched (two places). ) Is done. The wiring guard member 974 is a member for preventing a wiring (not shown) or the like connected to the relay movable substrate 972 from coming into contact with another portion due to the movement of the upper movable portion main body 970 and being disconnected. Further, the wiring guard member 974 is screwed (two places) to the upper movable portion main body 970 in a state where the relay movable substrate holding member 971 is screwed (in a state where the relay movable substrate 972 is sandwiched).

  The lower slide guide base member 978 is attached to the horizontal portion 952b of the base member 952, and has a plurality of screw holes (not shown) on the side surface facing the horizontal portion 952b. On the other hand, an insertion hole 952f communicating with the screw hole is arranged in the horizontal portion 952b. Therefore, the lower slide guide base member 978 is fixed to the horizontal portion 952b by inserting a screw (not shown) into the insertion hole 952f and screwing it into the screw hole.

  The base end of the lower slide guide base member 978 is close to the vertical portion 952a of the base member 952, and an urging member unit 981 described later is attached to the base end.

  The lower slide guide base member 978 has an inclined surface 978b whose distal end is farther from the vertical portion 952a, but which is gently inclined from the base end of the lower slide guide base member 978 toward the distal end when attached.

  A lower slide guide member 979 (rail) is attached to the inclined surface 978b. A plurality of insertion holes 979a are formed in the bottom surface of the lower slide guide member 979 along the longitudinal direction, and a screw hole 978c is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 979a of the inclined surface 978b to insert a screw (not shown). The lower slide guide member 979 is fixed to the lower slide guide base member 978 (inclined surface 978b) by being screwed into the screw hole 978c while being inserted into the hole 979a.

  The lower movable portion 982 is attached to the lower slide guide base member 978. The lower movable portion 982 supports the bearing portion 982a rotatably supporting the rotating shaft 961c disposed on the decoration base member 961, and supports the bearing portion 982a and also moves the bearing portion 982a in the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. A sliding portion 982b slidable (guided) diagonally up and down, and a slider 982c which is a base of the sliding portion 982b and is attached to the lower slide guide member 979 and slidable along the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. And.

  In the above configuration, when the drive source 968 is driven to rotate in the normal direction and applies a downward force to the upper movable portion main body 970, the upper movable portion main body 970 transmits the force to the decoration base member 961 via the rotating shaft 961b. Meanwhile, the decoration base member 961 is rotatably attached to the upper movable portion main body 970 and the lower movable portion 982, and functions as a link mechanism for transmitting a force between the upper movable portion main body 970 and the lower movable portion 982. Accordingly, when the decoration base member 961 receives a force from the drive source 968, the decoration base member 961 rotates with respect to the upper movable portion main body 970 (bearing portion 970b) and the lower movable portion 982 (bearing portion 982a), and the upper movable portion main body 970 Moving downward in the up-down direction, the lower movable portion 982 moves toward the distal end of the lower slide guide member 979. At this time, the decoration base member 961 (decoration member 960) is inclined from an upright state by moving the upper part vertically downward and moving the lower part toward the distal end side of the lower slide guide member 979. Conversely, when the driving source 968 is driven in the reverse direction to apply a rising force to the upper movable portion main body 970, the upper movable portion main body 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decoration base member 961 perform the reverse operation.

  In order to reliably perform the above-described operation, in the initial state (normal game state), the rotation shaft 961c is located at the distal end side of the lower slide guide member 979 with respect to a position vertically below the rotation shaft 961b (bottom dead center of the link mechanism). It is necessary to design the decoration base member 961 so as to be arranged at a displaced position.

  FIG. 43 is an exploded view of the urging member unit 981 that forms the movable accessory main body 950. As shown in FIG. 43, the urging member unit 981 includes a spring-shaped urging member 981b, a front cover member 981c that supports the urging member 981b in a manner in which the urging member 981b is wound, and a front cover member 981b. A lower slide guide accommodating a rear cover member 981g, which is arranged at the rear of the front cover member 981c and sandwiches the urging member 981b together with the front cover member 981c, and an integrated member 981a composed of the front cover member 981c, the urging member 981b, and the rear cover member 981g. It includes a biasing base member 981i attached to the base member 978, and a pin 981m that penetrates the integral body 981a and the biasing base member 981i to rotatably support the integral body 981a on the biasing base member 981i. .

  For example, a conston spring is applied to the urging member 981b, and the extending direction thereof matches the longitudinal direction of the lower slide guide member 979. It is preferable that the biasing member 981b has a substantially constant restoring force (biasing force) irrespective of the feeding amount, and the number of windings can be arbitrarily applied. The tip of the biasing member 981b is connected to the lower movable part 982 (see FIG. 44).

  The front cover member 981c is coaxially attached to a cylindrical portion 981d around which the urging member 981b is wound and a side surface (the front side of the gaming machine 10) of the cylindrical portion 981d, and a flange portion 981e having a larger diameter than the cylindrical portion 981d. And The proximal end of the urging member 981b is connected to the cylindrical portion 981d. The rear cover member 981g has the same shape as the flange portion 981e, and is coaxially connected to the cylindrical portion 981d. At the center of each of the flange portion 981e and the rear cover member 981g, an insertion hole 981f and an insertion hole 981h for inserting the pin 981m are formed.

  The tip of the pin 981m is a male screw 981n, and the male screw 981n is screwed into the female screw 981p. Further, an insertion hole 981j and an insertion hole 981k through which the pin 981m is inserted are formed in the urging base member 981i. Accordingly, the integral member 981a is housed in the biasing base member 981i, the pin 981m is inserted into the insertion hole 981j, the insertion hole 981f, the insertion hole 981h, and the insertion hole 981k, and the male screw 981n is screwed into the female screw 981p. The urging member unit 981 is constructed.

  When the urging member 981b is pulled in this state, the urging member 981b is fed out from the integral member 981a and the integral member 981a rotates. When the urging member 981b is released in this state, the urging member 981b is wound around the integral member 981a by its own restoring force. At this time, the integral member 981a is rotated in the opposite direction by the restoring force.

  FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing the operation of the lower movable portion 982 that guides the movement of the movable accessory main body 950. FIG. 44A shows a case where the biasing member 981b is in an initial state, and FIG. The case where the urging member 981b is extended is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the lower movable portion 982 is arranged on the base end side of the lower slide guide member 979 in an initial state (normal game state). Then, as shown in FIG. 44B, the lower movable portion 982 can be moved to the distal end side of the lower slide guide member 979. In this case, the lower movable portion 982 receives the force from the driving source 968 (and the load between the decorative member 960 and the upper movable portion 970) via the bearing portion 982a and the decorative member 960, and the lower slide guide member. 979 can be moved to the tip side. Further, a restoring force is generated in the urging member 981b by being fed out from the integral member 981a.

  On the other hand, when the driving source 968 is stopped, the lower movable portion 982 can return to the base end side by the restoring force of the urging member 981b. However, a load is applied to the lower movable portion 982 to slide in the distal direction from the decoration member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970). In addition, the lower slide guide member 979 is inclined toward the distal end, and the lower movable portion 982 exerts a force to slide toward the distal end by its own weight.

  Therefore, it is preferable to design the restoring force of the biasing member 981b so as to match the force for sliding in the distal direction. Accordingly, even when the driving source 968 stops, the lower movable portion 982 can remain at the position at the time when the driving source 968 stops. Then, by rotating the drive source 968 in the reverse direction, the lower movable part 982 and the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable part 970) can be returned to the initial position, and the load on the drive source 968 at that time can be reduced. Can be. Therefore, the lower movable portion 982 can be slid smoothly on the lower slide guide member 979 by the forward rotation drive and the reverse rotation drive of the drive source 968.

  By the way, there is a case where an effect is performed in which the lower movable portion 982 reciprocates between the intermediate position (FIGS. 47 and 48) and the maximum position (FIGS. 49 and 50). As the effect, for example, to pretend that the small hit rush (probable change state) is over, the movable role 820 is intentionally moved from the maximum position (final position, see FIG. 37) corresponding to the small hit rush (probable change state) to the intermediate position ( (Refer to FIG. 36). However, in actuality, the small hit rush is not yet finished, so that the “gase effect” is immediately returned to the maximum position. In such an effect, if the movement of the movable role 820 (the lower movable portion 982) is not smooth (since the restoring force is not constant depending on the position of the movable role 820 in the case of a normal spring), the movement By the way, it is discovered that it is "gase production". However, if the movement is smooth as described above, the result can not be known until the operation is completely completed, and the effect can be watched to the end.

  Note that the restoring force of the urging member 981b (the force for returning the urging member 981b to the base end side) is caused by the load of the decoration member 960 (and the upper movable portion 970) and the weight of the lower movable portion 982 sliding in the distal direction. It is also preferable to design so as to be larger than (the force pulling the urging member 981b toward the distal end). Thus, when the drive source 968 is stopped, the lower movable part 982 and the decorative member 960 (and the upper movable part 970) can be smoothly returned to the initial position by the urging force of the urging member 981b.

(Operation of movable character body)
FIG. 45 is a front view (initial position) of the movable accessory main body 950. FIG. 46 is a rear view of FIG. FIG. 47 is a front view (middle position) of the movable accessory main body 950. FIG. 48 is a rear view of FIGS. 48 and 47. FIG. 49 is a front view (maximum position, final position) of the movable accessory main body 950. FIG. 50 is a rear view of FIG. 49.

  The operation of the movable accessory main body 950 will be described. First, in the initial position (normal gaming state, see FIG. 35) shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the upper movable portion 970 is arranged at the highest position, and the lower movable portion 982 is arranged on the base end side of the lower slide guide member 979. The decorative member 960 is arranged in a state where the longitudinal direction is raised (a state in which the inclination angle is the largest).

  Here, the guide surface 954a has a vertical surface as a whole, but has a shape that is curved toward the distal end side of the lower slide guide member 979 at the lower part. The guide surface 956a has a shape that forms a substantially same curved surface as the guide surface 954a in a region adjacent to the guide surface 954a, and has an inclined surface (curved surface) that is inclined similarly to the lower slide guide member 979 in an intermediate region. In the distal end region, it has a curved surface that rises so as to increase in inclination toward the distal end. The guide member 964a contacts (or points in contact with) the guide surface 954a, and the guide member 964b contacts (or points in contact with) the guide surface 956a.

  In the above arrangement, when the drive source 968 is driven to rotate in the normal direction, the upper movable portion 970 (the upper movable portion main body 970a) is lowered, and the lower movable portion 982 is moved through the decoration member 960 (the link mechanism). It receives the force from the (upper movable body 970a) and moves to the distal end side of the lower slide guide member 979. At this time, the guide member 964a slides (or rolls) downward on the guide surface 954a, and the guide member 964b slides (or rolls) toward the distal end of the lower slide guide member 979 on the guide surface 956a. The inclination angle decreases.

  The rotation shaft 961b rotates with respect to the upper movable portion 970 based on the change in the inclination angle, and the rotation shaft 961c also rotates with respect to the lower movable portion 982 based on the change in the inclination angle. Further, the urging member 981b is extended from the urging member unit 981 by an amount corresponding to the movement of the lower movable portion 982 toward the distal end of the lower slide guide member 979.

  Next, at an intermediate position (for example, in a time-saving state, see FIG. 36) shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with an intermediate region of the guide surface 956a. On the other hand, the guide member 964a is separated from the guide surface 954a. In this state, the accessory lamp 820a is disposed in front of the lower center of the display device 41 (see FIG. 36).

  At the maximum position (probable change state, see FIG. 37) shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the guide member 964b is in contact (or point contact) with the distal end region of the guide surface 956a. Along with this, the rotating shaft 961c (bearing portion 982a) rises inside the slide portion 982b. In order to perform this operation reliably, the slide portion 982b needs to be formed such that its longitudinal direction is inclined to the tip side of the lower slide guide member 979 with respect to the normal line of the lower slide guide member 979. In this state, the accessory lamp 820a is disposed in front of the lower right end of the display device 41 (see FIG. 37).

  47 to 50, when the drive source 968 stops, the movement of the upper movable portion 970, the lower movable portion 982, and the decoration member 960 stops, but as described above, when the drive source 968 stops. At the position. When the driving source 968 is driven in reverse, the upper movable part 970, the lower movable part 982, and the decoration member 960 can be returned to their initial positions.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the game (variable display game) results in a special result, the gaming machine 10 that generates a special gaming state (big hit, small hit) operates in the special gaming state. A possible variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806), a first light emitting means (gearpiece lamp 820a) capable of emitting light in response to the special game state, and a specific game state (probable change state) different from the special game state (A RUSH lamp 812) that performs a suggestive light emission that indicates that the small hit rush can occur (the small hit rush generation possible state). When the RUSH lamp 812) performs the suggestive light emission, the virtual line 8 including the line connecting the variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806) and the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812). Characterized in that it is arranged on 2.

  Thereby, the change of the game state and the place to be watched at that time (special fluctuation winning device 38) are indicated by the accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, and the special winning opening unit 806 (through the virtual line 822 that the player can recall). ) The player can easily grasp.

  In the second embodiment, the execution time of the game (variable display game) when the second light-emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) emits a suggestive light is the execution time of the game (variable display game) in the normal game state different from the special game state. It is characterized by being shorter. Thus, for example, when a small hit rush is occurring, the variable display game is quickly performed to enhance the rush feeling, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the second embodiment, a display device 41 that can display a predetermined effect is provided. The display device 41 can display a specific image (effect image 617) according to a special game state, and a specific image (effect image 617). Are displayed on the virtual line 822. Thereby, the player recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822 by the effect image 617, the accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, and (optionally, the mode display unit 674), and the big prize arranged on the virtual line 822. The line of sight is easily directed to the mouth unit 806 (special fluctuation winning device 38).

  In the second embodiment, the display device 41 can display first suggestion information (mode display section 674) indicating that the probability of the special game state being high is linked to the suggestive light emission (the suggestive light emission of the probable change state). The first suggestion information (mode display section 674) is displayed on a virtual line 822. Thereby, the player recognizes the existence of the virtual line 822 by the mode display section 674, the accessory lamp 820a, the RUSH lamp 812, and (optionally the effect image 617), and the big prize arranged on the virtual line 822. The line of sight is easily directed to the mouth unit 806 (special fluctuation winning device 38).

  In the second embodiment, the display device 41 displays second suggestion information (arrow image) indicating the direction in which the variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806) is arranged in conjunction with the suggestive light emission (the suggestive light emission at the time of a small hit). 619) can be displayed, and the second suggestion information (arrow image 619) is displayed on the virtual line 822. As a result, the player's line of sight can be reliably directed to the special winning opening unit 806 (the special variable winning device 38).

  In the second embodiment, the first light emitting unit (the accessory lamp 820a) emits light in a light emitting mode related to the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit (RUSH lamp 812). Thus, the accessory lamp 820a can support the suggestion of a small hit rush by the RUSH lamp 812, and the line of sight can be easily directed to the large winning opening unit 806 (the special variable winning device 38).

  In the second embodiment, the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) emits light in a light emission mode different from the suggestive light emission in the special game state (big hit). This makes it possible to distinguish between a small hit rush suggestion and a big hit suggestion.

  In the second embodiment, the second light emitting means (RUSH lamp 812) is arranged on the opposite side of the first light emitting means (commodity lamp 820a) across the variable winning device (large winning opening unit 806). Features. As a result, when the accessory lamp 820a and the RUSH lamp 812 are lit, the large winning opening unit 806 (special variable winning device) sandwiched therebetween can be noticed.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment includes a unit (general winning opening unit 808) having a winning opening (general winning opening 35), and is specially provided when the result of the game (variable display game) is a special result. In the gaming machine 10 for generating a gaming state, a decoration portion (seal 815) for decorating the unit (general winning opening unit 808) is provided in front of the unit (general winning opening unit 808), and the winning opening ( It is characterized in that general winning opening position information (position information 819a, 819b) indicating the position of the general winning opening 35) and related information 817 related to the special gaming state are displayed.

  Thereby, the seal 815 displays the winning opening position information (position information 819a, 819b) and the related information 817, so that the player can watch. In addition, since the related information 817 is displayed on the sticker 815, the contents of the special game state can be easily understood.

  Further, by applying the seal 815 reflecting the related information 817 to other models having different related information 817, the general winning opening unit 808 can be applied to other models, and the general winning opening unit 808 can be applied. Versatility can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the unit (general winning opening unit 808) includes the collective display device 50 that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 so as to be visible from the front of the unit (general winning opening unit 808). The related information 817 is information relating to a display mode of the collective display device 50. Thereby, the game state displayed on the collective display device 50 can be grasped from the related information 817.

  In the second embodiment, the related information 817 is characterized in that the related information 817 is information on the duration (round) of the special game state. Thus, the round information displayed on the collective display device 50 can be grasped from the related information 817.

  In the second embodiment, the seal 815 is characterized in that, when the unit (general winning opening unit 808) is viewed from the front, an area overlapping with the collective display device 50 is open. Thus, the seal 815 can be attached to the front surface of the unit (general winning opening unit 808) without impairing the visibility of the collective display device 50. Further, even when the seal 815 is transparent, it is preferable to open a portion overlapping with the collective display device 50. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the collective display device 50 becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the reflection of light on the surface of the seal 815. Further, it is possible to prevent dust from adhering between the seal 815 (adhesive portion) and the collective display device 50.

  In the second embodiment, when the unit (general winning opening unit 808) is viewed from the front, an area overlapping the collective display device 50 is transparent. Thus, the seal 815 can be attached to the front of the unit (general winning opening unit 808) without impairing the visibility of the collective display device 50.

  The second embodiment is characterized in that the sticker 815 displays emphasis information 815b for emphasizing a position at which lighting display according to the related information 817 is performed in the collective display device 50. Thereby, the lighting display part (round display part 60) corresponding to the related information 817 in the collective display device 50 can be reliably grasped.

  In the second embodiment, the unit (general winning opening unit 808) includes an out port 30b into which an out ball flows, and the seal 815 displays out port position information (position information 818a) indicating the position of the out port 30b. It is characterized by having been done. Thereby, the position of the out port 30b in the unit (general winning port unit 808) can be grasped.

  The second embodiment is characterized in that the seal 815 has a shape following the outer shape of the front surface of the unit (general winning opening unit 808). This makes it easy to position the seal 815 before attaching it to the unit (general winning opening unit 808).

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The configuration other than those described below may be the same as in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

(Game control device and effect control device)
FIG. 51 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, a game control device 100 (main board) is arranged at a lower portion on the back of the gaming machine 10. The game control device 100 is covered with a transparent case 100a and can be visually recognized from outside the case 100a.

  On the back of the gaming machine 10, a setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged on the game control device 100 (main board) or adjacent to the game control device 100. The setting key switch 93 can be operated by opening the lid 93a.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on, the setting becomes a variable state. For example, the performance display device 152 (FIG. 79) mounted on the game control device 100 The current probability set value is displayed, and the probability set value can be changed by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 which is also used as a set value change switch. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the setting variable state ends, and the performance display device 152 (FIG. 79) also goes out. When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting is confirmed, the current probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 152, and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. By turning it off, the setting confirmation state ends, and the performance display device 152 also goes out.

  An effect control device 300 is arranged at an upper portion on the back of the gaming machine 10. The effect control device 300 is housed in a transparent sub-board box 841, and the sub-board box 841 is attached to the back of the gaming machine 10.

[Configuration of sub-board box]
FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the sub-board box 841 that houses the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 52, the sub-board box 841 houses the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840. The ROM board 840 stores information on the effect contents of the effect control device 300, and stores information unique to each model of the gaming machine 10.

  The sub-board box 841 includes a box lower member 842 attached to the back of the gaming machine 10 and an internal space 841a that engages with the box lower member 842 and houses the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 (box lower member 842). The upper case member 843 (first case member) formed together with the second case member), the fastening screw 858 for fastening the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843, and the fastening screw 858 attached to the box upper member 843 to hide the fastening screw 858. A cover member 859 (caulking member).

  A plurality of insertion holes 844a are formed in the outer edge of the effect control device 300, and the screws 844b are inserted into the insertion holes 844a. A plurality of insertion holes 844a are also formed in the ROM board 840, and screws 844b are inserted into the insertion holes 844a.

  The effect control device 300 has a socket 844c, and the ROM board 840 has a connector 840a fitted into the socket 844c. Then, the connector 840a is fitted into the socket 844c, and the integrated unit of the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 is attached to the box lower member 842. The mounting positions of the socket 844c and the connector 840a may be interchanged.

  The box lower member 842 is a tray-shaped member whose side facing the box upper member 843 is open, and is a member on which the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 are attached. The box lower member 842 has a screw hole 842a at a position facing the insertion hole 844a arranged on the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840.

  Thus, with the insertion hole 844a and the screw hole 842a communicating with each other, the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 are attached to the box lower member 842 by inserting the screw 844b into the insertion hole 844a and screwing it into the screw hole 842a. Can be

  In the box lower member 842, a plurality of ribs 842b (convex portions) that are in contact with the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 are arranged. The rib 842b avoids interference with the device arranged on the effect control device 300 and the device arranged on the ROM board 840, and directly contacts the board (see FIG. 55). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the bending of the effect control device 300 and the ROM board 840 after the attachment.

  The box upper member 843 has substantially the same outer shape as the box lower member 842, and is a tray-shaped member having an open side facing the box lower member 842. A large number of ventilation holes 843a are formed in the box upper member 843 to release heat generated from the effect control device 300 to the outside. A notch 843b is formed at a position of the upper box member 843 corresponding to the outer periphery of the ROM board 840. The box upper member 843 can be taken out of the ROM board 840 by cutting it with a nipper or the like following the cut 843b. In the development stage of the gaming machine 10, since the ROM substrate 840 may be frequently taken out, the notch 843b is provided in consideration of work efficiency. Of course, at the time of normal use, it plays the same role as the air hole 843a.

  A display area 843c is provided on the surface of the box upper member 843. In the display area 843c, a seal or an information display board on which specifications of the gaming machine 10 and the like are described is arranged.

  The box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 have a configuration for engaging with each other. The upper part of the box lower member 842 has two first engaged portions 845, and the upper part of the box upper member 843 has two first engaging portions 846. The first engaged portion 845 has a claw shape extending upward from the box lower member 842 and bent in a direction away from the box upper member 843 from an intermediate position. The first engagement portion 846 includes an engagement hole 846a that extends from the upper portion of the box upper member 843 toward the box lower member 842, and through which the first engaged portion 845 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, a second engaged portion 847 is provided below the box lower member 842, and a second engaging portion 848 is also provided below the box upper member 843. The second engaging portion 848 is deformable so that it can be detachably fitted to the second engaged portion 847. The second engaged portion 847 also has a space for deforming the second engaging portion 848 in order to release the engagement with the second engaging portion 848.

  The engagement between the box upper member 843 and the box lower member 842 is performed by engaging the first engagement portion with the engagement hole 846a of the first engagement portion 846 in a state where the box upper member 843 is inclined with respect to the box lower member 842. 845 is inserted (engaged), and in this state, the box upper member 843 is rotated about the first engagement portion 846 to face the box lower member 842 and the second engagement portion 848 is engaged with the second engaged portion. What is necessary is just to engage with the part 847. Conversely, when the engagement is released, the upper box member 843 is moved around the first engagement portion 846 in a state where the second engagement portion 848 is deformed and the engagement with the second engaged portion 847 is released. What is necessary is just to turn (turn up) in the opposite direction.

  The box lower member 842 includes a plurality of back engaging portions 842c that engage with the back of the gaming machine 10 (FIGS. 55 and 56).

  FIG. 53 is a front view of the box upper member 843 to which the cover member 859 is attached. FIG. 54 is a partial detailed view of FIG. 53 (an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a dashed-dotted line in FIG. 53), where FIG. 54 (a) is a view without the cover member 859, and FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 9 is a diagram when a cover member 859 is attached. FIG. 55 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 53 and a detailed view thereof. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 53, showing a case where a cover member 859 is attached, and a detailed view thereof.

  The box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 are configured to fasten the engaged box lower member 842 and box upper member 843 to each other. The box lower member 842 includes a lower fastening portion 849 (FIG. 53) that extends downward from a lower portion of the box lower member 842 and has an open side facing the box upper member 843. The box upper member 843 extends downward from a lower portion of the box upper member 843, and has an upper fastening portion 852 () provided with a housing portion 853 for housing a cover member 859 described later on a side opposite to a side facing the box lower member 842. FIG. 52). The lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other by a fastening screw 858 (fastening means) (FIGS. 53 and 54 (a)).

  The lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 overlap each other when the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843 are engaged with each other, and are different from the internal space 841a formed by the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843. 851 (FIG. 55). This partition space 851 can accommodate a fastening screw 858.

  The lower fastening portion 849 has a screw hole 850 (fastening means) (FIGS. 55 and 56), and the upper fastening portion 852 has an insertion hole 854 (fastening means) (FIGS. 55 and 56). The screw hole 850 and the insertion hole 854 communicate with each other when the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 overlap. Therefore, the fastening screw 858 is introduced from the accommodation portion 853 side of the upper fastening portion 852, inserted into the insertion hole 854, and further screwed into the screw hole 850, whereby the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other. (FIGS. 55 and 56).

  A cover member 859 (FIG. 54) that covers the fastening screw 858 is attached to the upper fastening portion 852 in order to prohibit access of a tool (a driver or the like) for releasing the fastening of the fastening screw 858.

  As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, in this embodiment, a pair of lower fastening portions 849 (as a first lower fastening portion and a second lower fastening portion) are arranged, and the upper fastening portion 852 is also correspondingly provided (as a first lower fastening portion and a second lower fastening portion). A pair is arranged as an upper fastening portion and a second lower fastening portion, but each has a shape that is inverted left and right when viewed from the front. Correspondingly, the cover member 859 attached to one of the upper fastening portions 852 (the first upper fastening portion) and the cover member 859 attached to the other of the upper fastening portions 852 (the second upper fastening portion) have left and right sides as viewed from the front. Has an inverted shape. In addition, one of the upper fastening portions 852 (first upper fastening portion) and one of the lower fastening portions 849 (first lower connecting portion) opposed thereto overlap each other to form a partition space 851 (first partition space). The other (second upper fastening portion) of the upper fastening portion 852 and the other (second lower fastening portion) of the lower fastening portion 849 facing the same overlap to form a partition space 851 (second partition space) (FIG. 53, FIG. 55).

  Note that only one of the pair of lower fastening portions 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 is fastened by the fastening screw 858, and the fastening of the box upper member 843 and the box lower member 842 can be realized without fastening the other. it can. At this time, the fastening screw 858 may be housed in a partition space 851 formed in the other of the pair of the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 (see FIG. 55).

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the accommodation portion 853 has a shape following the outer shape of the cover member 859 as described later. A fixing portion 854a having an insertion hole 854 is provided at the bottom of the housing portion 853. The fastening portion 854a (upper fastening portion 852) is screwed into the screw hole 850 (FIG. 52) while the fastening screw 858 is inserted through the insertion hole 854, and the fixing portion 854a is fixed to the lower fastening portion 849. The lower fastening portion 849 can be fastened.

  Further, through holes 855 are formed in the lower and upper portions of the fixing portion 854a of the accommodation portion 853. Further, third engaged portions 856 extend from the upper inner wall and the lower inner wall of the accommodation portion 853 so as to cover a part of the through hole 855 when viewed from the front, respectively. It extends toward the bottom of the part 853 (FIG. 55).

[Configuration of cover member]
The cover member 859 has an outer shape provided with a rectangular lid 860 as viewed from the front and a notch 861 (FIG. 54B) protruding outward on one side of the lid 860. Has a circular opening 862. Correspondingly, as described above, the housing portion 853 includes the outer shape (the cover 860 and the notch 861) of the cover member 859 and the inner wall that follows the uneven shape. When the cover member 859 is accommodated in the housing portion 853, the peripheral edge of the lid portion 860 (and the notch 861) abuts on the peripheral edge of the housing portion 853. Thereby, the play of the cover member 859 accommodated in the accommodation portion 853 can be reduced. In addition, by attaching the notch 861 to the cover member 859 (the lid portion 860), the direction of attachment of the cover member 859 to the housing portion 853 can be determined (FIG. 54B).

  FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the cover member 859. FIG. 58 is a rear view showing the mounting surface of the cover member 859. FIG. 59 is a front view of the cover member 859. FIG. 60 is a left side view of the cover member 859. FIG. 61 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 62 is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIGS. 58 and 59.

  A pair of third engaging portions 863 (engaging portions) that engage with the housing portion 853 are arranged on the mounting surface (the surface facing the housing portion 853) of the cover member 859 (the lid portion 860) (FIG. 57). 58, 60). The third engagement portions 863 are arranged as a pair so as to be line-symmetrical (back-to-back) with the opening 862 sandwiched in the vertical direction (or in the horizontal direction). The third engaging portion 863 is a member extending in the normal direction of the mounting surface, and has a wedge portion 863a that protrudes from the other portion of the third engaging portion 863 and has a side surface having an arrow shape at the tip. (FIG. 60).

  Correspondingly, the accommodation portion 853 includes the third engaged portion 856 as described above (FIG. 55). The third engaged portion 856 is arranged as a pair so as to engage with the third engaging portion 863 from the outside, and the inclined portion comes into contact with the wedge portion 863 a of the third engaging portion 863 when the cover member 859 is attached. The surface 856a is provided.

  The third engaging portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are each deformable (FIG. 68). It is preferable that the width of the fixing portion 854a is shorter than the interval between the one third engaging portion 863 and the other third engaging portion 863. Thereby, the third engagement portion 863 is brought into contact with (pressed against) the third engaged portion 856, so that the pair of third engagement portions 863 approach each other (direction approaching the fixing portion 854a). The third engaging portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 can be easily deformed, and can be easily engaged.

  Conversely, the third engaged portions 856 are deformed in a direction in which the tip portions of the pair of third engaged portions 856 are separated from each other, and / or the wedge portions 863a of the pair of third engaged portions 863 approach each other. By deforming the third engaging portion 863 in such a manner, the engagement between the third engaging portion 863 (wedge portion 863a) and the third engaged portion 856 can be released. Therefore, the third engaging portion 863 is detachably engaged with the third engaged portion 856.

  Fitting portions 864A, 864B, 864C, and 864D (FIGS. 57 and 58) that fit into the housing portion 853 are arranged on the mounting surface of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860). Correspondingly, the accommodating portion 853 includes fitted portions 857A, 857B, 857C, and 857D into which the fitted portions 864A to 864D are fitted (FIG. 54A). By fitting the fitting portions 864A-864D into the fitted portions 857A-857D, it is possible to reduce the play of the cover member 859 after the third engagement portion 863 is engaged with the third engaged portion 856. Note that the fitting portion 864A is designed wider than the other fitting portions 864B-864D, and the fitting portion 857A is correspondingly designed wider than the other fitting portions 857B-857D. As a result, similarly to the notch 861, the direction of attachment of the cover member 859 to the housing portion 853 can be determined.

  In addition, the mounting surface of the lid portion 860 is connected to the fitting portion 864A and the fitting portion 964B to reinforce the rigidity of the two, and the fitting portion 864C and the fitting portion 864D are connected to reinforce the rigidity of both. A reinforcing portion 865B is provided (FIGS. 57 and 58).

  The opening 862 has a larger diameter than the fastening screw 858, and is formed so as to accommodate the fastening screw 858 inside when viewed from the front with the cover member 859 housed in the housing portion 853. . Then, as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, a cut portion (first cut portion 866, second cut portion 867) is arranged in opening 862 so as to cover at least a part of opening 862. The cutting section opens the opening 862 by being cut by itself.

  For example, the cutting portion passes through the center of the opening 862 and extends in the vertical direction (may be inclined), and connects to the upper end and the lower end of the inner wall of the opening 862 (FIG. 57, FIG. 58, FIG. 59, FIG. 61) and a second cutting portion 867 (FIG. 9) connected to the first cutting portion 866 in an arrangement orthogonal (intersecting) to the first cutting portion 866 when the opening portion 862 is viewed from the front. 57, 58, 59, and 62), and the opening 862 is covered in a cross shape (FIGS. 57 and 58) by the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867. The second cutting portion 867 is arranged so as to protrude toward the front side of the lid portion 860 (the side opposite to the side where the third engaging portion 863 is arranged) (FIGS. 60 and 62), and the outer periphery of the opening 862 (FIG. 59, FIG. 62).

  The cutting portion (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portion 867) covers the front of the fastening screw 858 so that a driver or the like cannot access the fastening screw 858 for fraud prevention. However, when repairing or replacing the effect control device 300 or the ROM board 840, it is necessary to cut the cut portion, open the opening 862, and remove the fastening screw 858. The cutting section is cut by cutting means such as a nipper.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, it is preferable that the thickness of the first cut portion 866 is smaller than the thickness of the lid portion 860. Thereby, the first cutting portion 866 can be easily cut. Further, as shown in FIG. 62, it is also preferable to form a groove 867b in the second cut portion 867 from the mounting surface (back surface) side. Thereby, the second cut portion 867 can be easily cut by cutting the portion where the groove 867b is formed. Here, the shape of the groove 867b is arbitrary, and may be concentric with the opening 862 as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58. If the cutting means such as a nipper has sufficient cutting strength, the thickness of the first cutting portion 866 may be the same as the thickness of the lid portion 860, and the groove 867b of the second cutting portion 867 may be omitted. .

  FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating a cutting region 866a of the first cutting portion 866 of the cover member 859. FIG. 63 (a) is a front view, and FIG. 63 (b) is a back surface (mounting surface) diagram. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a cutting area 867a of the second cutting portion 867 (and the first cutting portion 866) of the cover member 859, where FIG. 64 (a) is a front view and FIG. 64 (b) is a back surface (mounting). FIG.

  When cutting the cutting portion, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 63, it is preferable to cut the cutting region 866a of the first cutting portion 866 using a cutting means such as a nipper, and then, as shown in FIG. It is preferable to cut the cutting region 867a (groove 867b) of the second cutting portion 867 as shown in FIG. Alternatively, conversely, the cutting region 867a of the second cutting unit 867 may be cut, and then the cutting region of the first cutting unit may be cut. In any case, the cut piece 868 (FIG. 67 (a)) separated by cutting the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867 is formed on the front side of the lid portion 860 by the component of the second cut portion 867. Since there is a large weight, the cut piece 868 falls on the front side of the lid 860 and can be prevented from falling on the mounting surface side. Thereby, the cutting piece 868 can enter the partition space 851 (FIG. 55) and can avoid the trouble of taking it out. Of course, by cutting out the cut piece 868 in a state in which the part to be the cut piece 868 is supported by the operator in advance, it is possible to more reliably prevent the cut piece 868 from entering the inside of the housing portion 853.

[Cover member mounting process]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a process of attaching the cover member 859. FIG. 65A illustrates a process of attaching the fastening screw 858, and FIG. 65B illustrates a state before the cover member 859 is attached. FIG. 66 is a view showing a process of attaching the cover member 859. FIG. 66 (c) shows a state in which the cover member 859 is being attached to the box upper member 843, and FIG. 66 (d) shows a state where the cover member 859 is attached to the box upper member. 843, respectively.

  The step of attaching the cover member 859 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 65A, the lower fastening portion 849 (box lower member 842) and the upper fastening portion 852 (box upper member 843) are overlapped, and the fastening screw 858 is inserted into the insertion hole 854 of the upper fastening portion 852. Then, the lower fastening portion 849 and the upper fastening portion 852 are fastened to each other by screwing into the screw holes 850. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the cover member 859 is housed in the housing portion 853.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the cover member 859 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 853, the wedge portion 863a of the third engagement portion 863 constituting the cover member 859 is attached to the inclined surface 856a of the third engaged portion 856. The third engagement portions 863 apply a stress to the third engaged portions 856 by a so-called wedge effect by the so-called wedge effect, and the pair of third engaged portions 856 are deformed in a direction away from each other. On the other hand, the third engagement portion 863 receives a reaction force (stress) from the third engaged portion 856 and is deformed in a direction in which the pair of third engagement portions 863 approach each other. The third engagement portion 863 (wedge portion 863a) advances toward the through hole 855 while performing such deformation.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (d), when the wedge portion 863a enters the through hole 855 and the wedge portion 893a passes through the third engaged portion 856, the wedge portion 863a moves to the third engaged portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856. The applied stress is released, and the wedge portion 863a is engaged with the distal end portion of the third engaged portion 856. As a result, the cover member 859 is attached to the upper fastening portion 852 in a manner to be accommodated in the accommodation portion 853. At this time, the fitting portions 864A-864D are fitted into the fitted portions 857A-857D, and the periphery of the lid 860 (and the notch 861) abuts the periphery of the housing portion 853 (FIG. 54 (a), FIG. 58). reference).

[Removal process of cover member]
FIGS. 67A and 67B are views showing a step of removing the cover member 859, FIG. 67A shows a step of cutting the cut portion, and FIG. 67B shows a step of removing the fastening screw 858, respectively. FIG. 68 is a view showing a step of removing the cover member 859. FIG. 68 (c) shows a state in which the cover member 859 is being removed from the box upper member 843, and FIG. 843 shows a state in which it has been detached.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first cut portion 866 and the second cut portion 867 are cut, a cut piece 868 is taken out, and the opening 862 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), a driver or the like is introduced through the opening 862 to release the fastening of the fastening screw 858, and the lower fastening portion 849 (box lower member 842) and the upper fastening portion 852 (box upper member 843). And separate.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (c), the third engagement portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 are deformed, and the wedge portion 863a is taken out from the through hole 855. At this time, for example, the wedge portions 863a of the pair of third engaging portions 863 are deformed so as to approach each other, and / or the tip ends of the pair of third engaged portions 856 are deformed so as to be separated from each other. The engagement between the portion 863a and the distal end portion of the third engaged portion 856 may be released, and the wedge 863a may be pushed toward the lid 860 in this state. Thereby, the wedge portion 863a comes into contact with the inclined surface 856a of the third engaged portion 856. When the wedge 863a is further pushed into the lid 860, the deformation of the third engaged portion 856 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (d), when the pushing of the wedge portion 863a is continued, the third engagement portion 863 and the third engaged portion 856 return to the original shape, and the wedge portion 863a is moved to the third engaged portion. By separating from the 856, the used cover member 859 separates from the housing portion 853 (the upper fastening portion 852). Then, in the case of refastening, the steps shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 may be performed by preparing a new cover member 859 and reusing the box lower member 842 and the box upper member 843.

[First Modification of Cover Member]
FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of a first modification of the cover member 859. The cover member 859a of the first modification has the same outer shape as the cover member 859 (see FIG. 62), but a portion corresponding to the second cut portion 867 of the cover member 859a is an extension 869. I have. The extension portion 869 is connected to the first cut portion 866 in a state of being orthogonal (intersecting) similarly to the second cut 867 portion. However, unlike the second cutting portion 867, the lid portion 860 is in contact with the lid portion 860 in a non-connected (not connected) state at a position on the outer periphery of the opening portion 862, or at a predetermined interval. Away from

  Thus, only by cutting the first cutting portion 866, a part of the first cutting portion 866 and the cut piece 870 formed by the extension portion 869 are separated from the lid portion 860, so that work efficiency is improved. Further, since the length of the extension 869 constituting the cut piece 870 is longer than the diameter of the opening 862, the cut piece 870 can be prevented from entering the inside of the cover member 859a.

[Second Modification of Cover Member]
70A and 70B show a second modification of the cover member 859. FIG. 70A is a front view, and FIG. 70B is a rear view. The cover member 859b of the second modified example has a configuration in which a first cut portion 866 and a second cut portion 867c are connected within an opening 862. The second cutting portion 877c is orthogonal to (intersects with) the first cutting portion 866 and has both ends connected to left and right inner walls of the opening 862. The first cutting portion 866 and the second cutting portion 867c form a cross-shaped opening. The part 862 is covered. In this modified example, by cutting the cutting area 866a and the cutting area 867d, there is a possibility that the cutting piece 871 enters the inside of the cover member 859b, but the cutting piece 871 does not hinder the removal of the cover member 859b. Can be applied to the second modification.

  In the second modified example, the opening 862 is covered with a cross shape. However, any other shape than the cross shape may be used as long as a gap is left in the opening 862 where a tip of a cutting unit such as a nipper can enter. For example, a configuration may be used in which three first cut portions 866 (or second cut portions 867c) are connected to the opening 862 in a state where they cross each other at 120 degrees. Further, for example, a configuration in which one first cutting portion 866 and two second cutting portions 867 are connected to the opening 862 in a state of intersecting each other at 120 degrees may be employed.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is accommodated in the (sub-substrate box 841) internal space 841a formed by the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842). In the gaming machine 10 having a base board (production control device 300), fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850) for fastening the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842). , A fastening screw 858) and a cover member 859 that is arranged to engage with the first case member (the box upper member 843) and cover the fastening means (the insertion hole 854, the screw hole 850, and the fastening screw 858). The cover member 859 is detachably engaged with the first case member (the box upper member 843).

  Conventionally, when the cover member (cover member 859) is mounted again on the board box (sub-board box 841) (when the cover member covers the fastening means (the fastening screws 858 and the like) again), the cover member after cutting (opening) is There is a problem that costs are increased because the entire mounted substrate box is replaced. Further, when the opened substrate box is fastened again by the fastening means, since the cover member is cut (opened), the security is vulnerable and there is a risk of being tampered with.

  However, with the above structure, the first case member (box upper member 843) and the second case member (box lower member 842) can be reused by removing the cover member 859, so that the cost can be suppressed. Further, when the first case member (the box upper member 843) and the second case member (the box lower member 842) are fastened again by the fastening means, the fastening means can be covered by a new cover member 859 thereafter, so that the substrate It is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation on the (effect control device 300) and to suppress costs.

  In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 has an opening 862 at a position facing the fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858), and the opening 862 has at least a part of the opening 862. And a cutting section (first cutting section 866, second cutting sections 867 and 867c) that is arranged so as to cover and open the opening 862 by being cut. This prohibits the cutting section from accessing the means (driver or the like) for releasing the fastening of the fastening means (fastening screw 858). Further, since the cutting portion (first cutting portion 866, second cutting portion 867, 867c) covers the opening 862 leaving a gap into which the tip of the cutting portion (nipper or the like) enters, the cutting portion is Cutting can be easily performed.

  In the third embodiment, the cutting portion is disposed so as to intersect with the first cutting portion 866 having both ends attached to the inner wall of the opening 862 and the first cutting portion 866 when the opening 862 is viewed from the front. And a second cutting portion 867 connected to the cover member 859 (lid portion 860) and the first cutting portion 866. The second cutting portion 867 is provided with fastening means (an insertion hole 854, a screw hole 850) for the cover member 859. , Connecting screw (858) to the opposite surface (front surface) of the surface (mounting surface).

  Conventionally, when the cover member is cut, a part of the cover member (the portion that is cut and removed) falls into the substrate box or outside the substrate box, resulting in poor cutting work efficiency.

  However, according to the above configuration, the cutting portion can be realized with a simple configuration, and the cutting piece 868 that cuts and separates the first cutting portion 866 and the second cutting portion 867 falls to the front side by the weight of the second cutting portion 867. I do. Therefore, it is not necessary to take out the cut piece 868 without the cut piece 868 falling inside the cover member 559, and the falling direction can be predicted, so that the complexity of the operation can be reduced.

  The third embodiment is characterized in that a groove 867b is formed at a cutting position of the second cutting portion 867. Thereby, the second cutting portion 867 can be easily cut.

  In the third embodiment, the cutting portion includes a first cutting portion 866 having both ends connected to the inner wall of the opening 862, and a first cutting portion 866 extending from the first cutting portion 866 so as to intersect with the first cutting portion 866. And a second cutting portion 867c connected to the inner wall. Thereby, the cutting unit can be realized with a simple configuration.

  In the third embodiment, the cutting portion is disposed so as to intersect with the first cutting portion 866 having both ends connected to the inner wall of the opening 862 and the first cutting portion 866 when the opening 862 is viewed from the front. And an extension portion 869 connected to the first cutting portion 866 and not connected to the cover member 859 (lid portion 860). The extension portion 869 includes a cover member 859 (lid portion). 860) on the opposite surface (front surface) of the surface (mounting surface) facing the fastening means (insertion hole 854, screw hole 850, fastening screw 858).

  Thus, only by cutting the first cutting portion 866, a part of the first cutting portion 866 and the cut piece 870 formed by the extension portion 869 are separated from the lid portion 860, so that work efficiency is improved. Further, since the length of the extension 869 constituting the cut piece 870 is longer than the diameter of the opening 862, the cut piece 870 can be prevented from entering the inside of the cover member 859a.

In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 includes an engaging portion (third engaging portion 863), and the first case member (the box upper member 843, the upper fastening portion 852) includes an engaged portion (third engaged portion). Engaging portion 856), and the engaging member (third engaging portion 863) is engaged with the engaged portion (third engaged portion 856), so that the cover member 859 is connected to the first case member (above the box). The engaging portion (third engaging portion 863) and the engaged portion (third engaged portion 856) are disengaged from each other when engaged. It is characterized in that it can be deformed in the direction of movement.
This makes it possible to realize a detachable cover member 859 with a simple configuration.

  In the third embodiment, the cover member 859 includes fitting portions 864A to 864D, the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) includes fitting portions 857A to 857D, and the fitting portions 864A to 864D are engaged when engaged. It is characterized in that it is fitted into the fitted portions 857A-857D. This can reduce the play of the cover member 859 after the third engagement portion 863 is engaged with the third engaged portion 856.

  In the third embodiment, the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) includes an accommodation portion 853 capable of accommodating the cover member 859 at the time of engagement, and the periphery of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860) is accommodated at the time of engagement. It is characterized by being in contact with the periphery of the portion 853. Thereby, the play of the cover member 859 accommodated in the accommodation portion 853 can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, a notch 861 is formed on the periphery of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860), and the accommodation portion 853 is formed following the outer shape of the periphery of the cover member 859 (lid portion 860) including the notch 861. It is characterized by having been done. Thereby, the direction of attachment of the cover member 859 to the accommodation portion 853 can be determined.

  In the third embodiment, a partition space 851 different from the internal space 841a is provided between the first case member (upper fastening portion 852) and the second case member (lower fastening portion 849), and the fastening means comprises a first case member. A screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the member (upper fastening portion 852) and the second case member (lower fastening portion 849) is provided, and the screw (fastening screw 858) can be housed in the partition space 851. And Accordingly, even when the fastening screw 858 is not used for fastening, the fastening screw 858 can be prevented from being lost by being housed in the partition space 851.

  In the third embodiment, the first case member (box upper member 843) is arranged at a position different from the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852). And a second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852). The second case member (box lower member 842) includes a first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) and a second lower fastening portion (different from the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849)). Lower fastening portion 849). The first case member (the box upper member 843) and the second case member (the box lower member 842) are engaged to form the first upper fastening portion (the upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (the lower fastening portion 849). Are opposed to each other, and the second upper fastening portion and the second lower fastening portion are opposed to each other. The screws include a first screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849), and a second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852). ) And a second screw (fastening screw 858) for fastening the second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849). The partition space 851 includes a first partition space (partition space 851) formed by overlapping a first upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and a first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849), and a second upper fastening portion. A second partition space (partition space 851) formed by overlapping the upper portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the second lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849). Then, with the first screw (fastening screw 858) accommodated in the first partition space (partition space 851), the second upper fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the second lower fastening by the second screw (fastening screw 858). (Lower fastening portion 849) or the first upper screw with the first screw (fastening screw 858) while the second screw (fastening screw 858) is housed in the second partition space (partition space 851). The fastening portion (upper fastening portion 852) and the first lower fastening portion (lower fastening portion 849) can be fastened.

  With the above configuration, the cover member 859 can be attached to both upper fastening portions 852 in a state where the fastening screw 858 is housed in one partition space 851. When the substrate (production control device 300) is to be taken out for inspection or the like, the cover member 859 attached to the other upper fastening portion 852 is opened, and the fastening screw 858 used for fastening is removed. The control device 300) and the fastening screw 858 housed in the one partition space 851 can be taken out. Thereafter, when re-fastening, the unopened cover member 859 attached to the one upper fastening portion 852 is temporarily removed from the upper fastening portion 852, and both the upper fastening portion 852 and the lower fastening portion 849 are fastened with the fastening screw 858. An unopened cover member 859 can be attached to each of the upper fastening portions 852 while being fastened. That is, by storing the fastening screw 858 in one of the partition spaces 851, even if it is opened once, it can be tightened again, so that it is possible to retighten from one inspection without replacing both the cover members 859. And cost reduction can be achieved.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 78. The fourth embodiment relates to the details of the configuration of the big winning opening unit 800 (V attacker, big winning unit) on the upper side. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those in the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

  FIG. 71 is an exploded view of the game board 30, the control base unit 813, and the like.

  Although the configuration of the gaming board 30 is as described above (see FIG. 35 and the like), the gaming board 30 has the large winning opening unit 800 accommodated in the accommodation portion 30f and the center of the gaming board of the large winning opening unit 800. It also has a decorative member 831 arranged on the left side (here, on the left side). The decorative member 831 is an opaque member on which a character or the like is drawn. Even if the housing of the special winning opening unit 800 is transparent on the center side of the game board (here, on the left side), a player can enter from the center of the game board. The inside of the special winning opening unit 800 is made invisible. The central portion 831a located at the center in the up-down direction of the decorative member 831 is disposed so as to face the big winning opening unit 800 and cover from the center of the game board. The upper part 831b and the lower part 831c of the decorative member 831 in the vertical direction may be arranged so as to face the flow channel unit 802 and the general-purpose unit 804 and to cover from the center of the game board.

  The control base unit 813 is attached to the back of the game board 30. The control base unit 813 includes a drop accessory 810 (described above), a movable accessory 820 (described above), a control unit 830, and a logo member 832. The control unit 830 has a substantially box-like shape, has a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction, and accommodates a dropping accessory 810 (described above), a movable accessory 820 (described above), a logo member 832, and the like. The control unit 830 integrally includes a back plate 830a serving as a bottom, an upper plate 830b, a right plate 830c, a left plate 830d, and a lower plate 830e serving as walls. An opening 830f for making the display screen of the display device 41 (FIG. 35) visible is formed in the back plate 830a, and the display device 41 (FIG. 35) is attached to the back of the opening 830f. Further, behind the control unit 830, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are arranged (FIG. 51).

  The dropping object 810 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the upper plate 830b. The movable accessory 820 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the left plate 830d and the lower plate 830e. The logo member 832 is attached to the control unit 830 at a position facing the lower plate 830e on the back side behind the movable role 820. A logo (character) such as a model name of the gaming machine 10 is displayed on the logo member 832, and the logo can be visually recognized by a player through a transparent lower portion of the center case 40 (above the stage portion 40b) (FIG. 35).

  FIG. 72 is an exploded view of the special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker, large receiving unit).

  The large winning opening unit 800 includes a large entering unit base 902, an intermediate member 904 disposed behind the lower left portion of the large entering unit base 902, and a part of the intermediate member 904 behind a lower right portion of the large entering unit base 902. A movable portion driving mechanism 906 disposed adjacent to the right side of the main unit, a general winning opening discharge unit 908 disposed behind the right central portion of the large entry unit base 902 and substantially above the movable portion driving mechanism 906, and an intermediate member. The large-inlet-splash-portion drive mechanism 910 disposed substantially behind the large-entry-unit base 902, the transparent front decoration member 912 disposed in front of the large-inlet-portion unit base 902, and the blade member 914a driven by the large-inlet-portion-portion drive mechanism 910 And a large winning opening splash portion 914 (wing member) that opens and closes.

  The special winning opening unit 800 includes a special winning opening switch 35a that detects a game ball passing through the general winning opening 35, and a special winning opening switch 43 that detects a game ball passing through the special winning opening 902h (the upper winning opening switch). 39a, a special winning count switch), a specific area switch 72 (V switch) for detecting a game ball passing through the specific area 86 (V winning opening), and passing through the special winning opening 902h but not passing through the specific area 86 Remaining ball discharge port switch 73 (detection means, remaining ball switch) for detecting the game ball as a remaining ball. Note that the special winning opening 902h may be defined as an entrance portion (FIGS. 72 and 74) that is opened and closed by a blade member 914a of a first inflow path 917 (FIGS. 75 and 77) described later. The opening of the switch 43 (39a) (FIGS. 72 and 75) may be defined.

  The special winning opening unit 800 includes a special area switch 72 (specific area 86), a remaining ball discharging port switch 73, and a first below-described switch by combining a special winning unit base 902, an intermediate member 904, and a general winning opening discharge unit 908. A housing that includes the inflow path 917 (and the second inflow path 918) is configured, and the housing includes a general winning opening 35 and a distribution path of game balls that have won the general winning opening 35. As a result, the entire unit can be reduced in size, and the occupied area (volume) of the game area 32 can be reduced.

  The large entry unit base 902 is a flow path forming member, and is attached so that the front decoration member 912 covers the front side, so that various flow paths of the game ball (upper left flow path 902a described later with reference to FIGS. An upper channel 902b, a lower right channel 902d, etc.) are formed. For this reason, the large input unit base 902 has a plate-shaped rear portion 902f and flow path walls 902g provided at various locations and extending in the front-rear direction from the rear portion 902f. The lower left inner flow path 902c is formed by attaching the flow path forming portion 904c of the intermediate member 904 from behind.

  The large entrance unit base 902 has a passage frame 902k (a part of the passage wall 902g) that forms a passage of a game ball passing through or passing through the specific area 86. The passage frame 902k has a rectangular cross section perpendicular to the front-rear direction, and has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The specific area switch 72 is inserted and mounted in the passage frame 902k, and an opening (corresponding to the specific area 86) of the specific area switch 72 is arranged in the passage frame 902k. The winning opening switch 35a, the winning opening switch 43, and the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 are disposed on the rear surface 902f of the large winning unit base 902 so as to face each other from behind. The special winning unit base 902 has a general winning opening 35 at an upper portion, and the winning opening switch 35a is disposed behind the general winning opening 35.

  A winning port switch 35a, a special winning port switch 43, a specific area switch 72, and a remaining ball discharge port switch 73 are provided in this order from the top of the large winning unit base 902. The opening of the special winning opening switch 43 through which the game ball passes is disposed vertically above and behind the specific area switch 72 and the front of the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 (see FIGS. 75 and 77). .

  The large winning unit base 902 has an insertion hole 902e into which the bar-shaped magnetic sensor 908a of the general winning opening discharge unit 908 is inserted, and a through hole 902i through which a shaft portion 914b of the large winning opening flap portion 914 penetrates in the front-rear direction. And a guide hole 902j in which the guide 914c of the large winning opening flap portion 914 is slidably guided. In addition, the large-size unit base 902 has an LED board 902m having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back surface 902f. The LED of the LED board 902m may emit light when the specific area switch 72 is detected (V winning). Even if a translucent front decoration 911 (FIG. 74, FIG. 76) having a different color or pattern from the front decoration member 912 is attached to a position corresponding to the opening on the front surface of the specific area 86 of the large entrance unit base 902. Good.

  The intermediate member 904 includes an LED substrate 904a having a plurality of LEDs on an upper portion thereof, a through hole 904b through which a shaft portion 914b of the large winning opening splash portion 914 penetrates in a front-rear direction, and a flow path component provided in front of the LED substrate 904a. 904c. The inside of the flow path configuration unit 904c is a lower left rear flow path 902c, and the special winning opening switch 43 is disposed below the flow path configuration unit 904c. At the lower part of the intermediate member 904, the opening is disposed rearward, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 is attached. The LED on the LED board 904a can irradiate light to the lower left rear flow path 902c, and may emit light when the large winning opening switch 43 detects the light.

  As described later, when the blade member 914a of the special winning opening splash portion 914 is in an open state, the upper left flow path 902a or the upper right flow path 902b above the special winning opening splash portion 914 and the special winning opening 902h. A game ball that has flowed down through the special winning opening 902h (see FIG. 74) passes through the lower left back channel 902c and is detected by the special winning opening switch 43. Thereafter, the game ball detected by the special winning opening switch 43 is detected by the specific area switch 72 or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 (detection means) according to the position of the movable member 906a of the movable section drive mechanism 906 ( 74 to 77). When the blade member 914a of the special winning opening splash portion 914 is closed, the game ball flowing down the upper left channel 902a or the upper right channel 902b enters the lower right channel 902d.

  The movable part driving mechanism 906 applies a force in the front-rear direction of the shaft part of the movable member 906a, a lever solenoid 906b (86b) (first driving means) as a drive source for driving the movable member 906a, and a left and right direction. And a lever 906c (first link mechanism) for converting the force to the movable member 906a. Further, the movable portion drive mechanism 906 includes a partition 906d disposed to the left of the lever 906c, a branch 906e disposed further to the left of the partition 906d, and a support 906f disposed below the branch 906e. , Prepare. A gap 906g is formed between the branching portion 906e and the support portion 906f, and the specific area switch 72 is inserted from the front in the gap 906g, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 is inserted from the rear ( 75 and 77).

  As will be described later, the branching portion 906e has an inclined surface 915 (front upper end surface) inclined forward, and can send a game ball that has passed through the special winning opening switch 43 to a specific region 86 in front. (See FIGS. 75 and 77). From the opening of the special winning opening switch 43 to the flow path on the inclined surface 915, a first inflow path 917 (FIGS. 75 and 77) through which game balls flow into the specific area 86 is formed. Further, the branch portion 906e has a rear upper end surface 916 that is slightly inclined rearward on the rear side of the inclined surface 915. On the rear upper end surface 916, a second inflow path 918 (FIGS. 75 and 77) through which game balls flow into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 (detection means) is formed.

  The movable member 906a is disposed above the branch portion 906e at the normal position (initial position), and does not exist above the branch portion 906e when retracted to the right of the partition portion 906d and moved to the operating position. When the movable member 906a is at the normal position above the branching portion 906e, the game ball cannot enter the first inflow path 917 on the inclined surface 915 because of the obstruction of the movable member 906a, and the second inflow path 918 (see FIG. 75). On the other hand, when the movable member 906a is in the operating position that is not above the branch portion 906e, the game ball can enter the first inflow path 917 on the inclined surface 915 without being disturbed by the movable member 906a ( See FIG. 77). As described above, the movable member 906 a is disposed in the first inflow path 917 at a branch position with the second inflow path 918. In the present embodiment, the position of the distal end portion (or the vicinity thereof) of the movable member 906a at the branch position, that is, the normal position is below the opening of the special winning opening switch 43, but is not limited to this.

  The general winning opening discharge unit 908 is provided with a magnetic sensor 908a as a part of a plurality of magnetic sensor switches 61 (FIG. 79) for detecting fraud. The magnetic sensor switch 61 penetrates through the insertion hole 902e of the large entrance unit base 902, and can detect magnetism in the large entrance opening 902h and the like of the large entrance unit base 902.

  The general winning opening discharging unit 908 has a winning opening switch attaching portion 908c to which the winning opening switch 35a is attached, and the winning opening switch 35a is provided on the upper portion of the front plate 908d. The general winning opening discharge unit 908 has a general winning opening discharging passage 908b for discharging a game ball, and the game ball passing through the winning opening switch 35a flows down along the front plate 908d, and enters from the entrance 908e. It passes through the discharge passage 908b. The flow path of the game ball is formed by the flow path forming member on the rear side of the back surface portion 902f of the large entrance unit base 902 and the front plate 908d of the general winning opening discharge unit 908.

  The front plate 908d of the general winning opening discharge unit 908 is provided substantially to the right of the LED board 904a of the intermediate member 904. The general winning opening discharge passage 908b of the general winning opening discharge unit 908 is provided substantially above the lever solenoid 906b (86b) of the movable portion driving mechanism 906.

  The large-entry splash driving mechanism 910 includes a shaft hole 910a to which the shaft 914b of the large-entry opening splash portion 914 (wing member) is attached, and a splash-port driving solenoid 910b (a second driving means, a large winning opening). A vertical force of the solenoid 39b), a plate-shaped front portion 910c disposed behind the LED board 904a of the intermediate member 904 and a fly portion driving solenoid 910b is converted into a rotational force of the game board 30 in the board surface direction. A conversion cam mechanism 910d (second link mechanism).

  The front decoration member 912 has a circular arc opening 912a for maintenance, which is arranged substantially in front of the special winning opening splash portion 914. A rod-shaped object can be inserted into the arc-shaped opening 912a, and ball clogging (ball biting) or the like by the blade member 914a of the special winning opening splash portion 914 can be resolved. The front decoration member 912 has a rectangular interior inside the passage frame 902k of the large entry unit base 902 so that the player can visually recognize the passage of the game ball through the opening of the specific area switch 72 (corresponding to the specific area 86). Is at least transparent, but only that portion may be transparent or entirely transparent. Further, the front decoration member 912 may have the translucent front decoration 911 (FIGS. 74 and 76) attached to a portion corresponding to the rectangular interior of the passage frame 902k as described above.

  The large winning opening splash portion 914 includes a blade member 914a that opens and closes the large winning opening 902h, a shaft portion 914b that is connected to a shaft hole 910a of the large winning splash portion driving mechanism 910, and a guide hole 902j of the large winning unit base 902. And a guide 914c that moves along. As described above, the shaft portion 914b is connected to the shaft hole portion 910a through the through hole 902i of the large unit base 902 and the through hole 904b of the intermediate member 904. Further, the blade member 914a rotates in the direction of the board surface of the game board 30 with the shaft portion 914b extending in the front-rear direction as a rotation axis.

[Operation of the large-diameter spring drive mechanism]
FIG. 73A is a perspective view showing the operation of the large-entry splash portion drive mechanism 910 of the large winning opening unit 800. FIG. 73A (a) shows an initial state, and FIG. The state in which a ball can be entered (a state in which the large winning port switch 43 (39a) can be won) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 73A, a spring driving solenoid 910 b included in the large-entry spring driving mechanism 910 moves a rod 910 e extending vertically with the vertical direction as a driving direction. The fly portion driving solenoid 910b keeps the rod 910e extended downward when it is not driven as shown in FIG. 73A (a), and pulls up when driving as shown in FIG. 73A (b). The fly portion driving solenoid 910b includes an urging spring (not shown) therein. When the driving of the fly portion driving solenoid 910b is stopped, the rod 910e is extended downward by the urging force of the urging spring (not shown). Then, the rod 910e is pulled upward by a driving force stronger than the urging force.

  The cam mechanism 910d includes a cam 910f that rotates the shaft hole 910a coaxially with the shaft 914b, and a connecting portion that is connected to the tip of the rod 910e and that has a slide hole 910i that extends in the left-right direction at a position facing the cam 910f. 910h, and a rod 910g extending from the cam 910f toward the connection portion 910h and entering the slide hole 910i. The rod 910g is in contact with the inner wall on the upper side and the lower side of the slide hole 910i, and is movable in the left-right direction with respect to the slide hole 910i.

  The cam 910f is disposed at an angle (for example, 45 degrees) in which the longitudinal direction (the radial direction of the shaft portion 914b) is inclined downward in FIG. 73A (a), and the longitudinal direction is upward in FIG. 73A (b). It is arranged at an angle (for example, 45 degrees) inclined in the direction. Therefore, when the fly portion drive solenoid 910b is driven, the cam 910f is pulled up by the connecting portion 910h via the rod 910g and has a predetermined rotation angle (eg, 90 degrees) from an angle inclined downward to an angle inclined upward. Degree) rotate. At this time, the blade member 914a also rotates at the same rotation angle as the cam 910f.

  At this time, the rod 910g moves in the left-right direction with respect to the slide hole 910i while rotating according to the rotation of the cam 910f. More specifically, when the cam 910f starts rotating from the initial position shown in FIG. 73A (a), the rod 910g is displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the slide hole 910i according to the left-right displacement (cosine component) of the cam 910f. When the longitudinal direction of the cam 910f becomes horizontal, the displacement of the rod 910g becomes maximum. When the cam 910f continues to rotate as it is, the displacement of the rod 910g decreases, and when it reaches the maximum rotation position shown in FIG. 73A (b), the rod 910g returns to the original position.

  As described above, the drive unit solenoid 910b has a vertical drive direction. Accordingly, the spring drive solenoid 910b (rod 910e) is not displaced by the vibration or impact from the front direction to rotate the blade member 914a, and the large splash spring drive mechanism 910 is resistant to vibration and impact. .

  If the displacement of the rod 910g in the left-right direction during rotation of the cam 910f is small and the displacement drive solenoid 910b can tolerate the displacement, the rod 910g and the slide hole 910i are omitted, and the cam 910f is connected to the connection portion 910h. May be pin-connected.

(Operation of movable part drive mechanism)
FIG. 73B is a plan view of the movable portion drive mechanism 906 of the special winning opening unit 800. FIG. 73B (a) shows a state where the remaining ball switch can be entered (initial state), and FIG. 73B (b) shows a state where the V switch is activated. The ball possible state (winning possible state) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, a lever solenoid 906b (86b) constituting the movable portion driving mechanism 906 moves a rod 906k extending in the front-rear direction with the front-rear direction as a driving direction. The lever solenoid 906b maintains the state in which the rod 906k is extended forward when not driven as shown in FIG. 73B (a), and is pulled backward when driven as shown in FIG. 73B (b). The lever solenoid 906b includes an urging spring (not shown) therein, and when the driving of the lever solenoid 906b is stopped, the rod 906k is extended forward by the urging force of the urging spring (not shown). The rod 906k is pulled backward by a stronger driving force.

  In this way, by setting the driving direction of the lever solenoid 906b (86b) constituting the movable portion driving mechanism 906 to the front-back direction, it is possible to secure a visible area of the game ball on the front surface of the large entry unit base 902. Note that a connection portion 906m is disposed at the tip of the rod 906k.

  The movable member 906a is inserted into a partition 906d having an insertion hole 906n (FIGS. 75 and 77) following the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape, and the longitudinal direction thereof is movable in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the movable member 906a is not displaced by vibration, impact, or the like from the front direction, and becomes a movable member 906a resistant to vibration and impact. Further, in the initial state (normal position, initial position) shown in FIG. 73B (a), the movable member 906a has its tip end extended from the insertion hole 906n and arranged above the branch portion 906e. In the driving state (operating position) shown in b), the distal end portion enters the insertion hole 906n.

  The lever 906c includes a pin connection portion 906h that is pin-connected to the main body of the movable portion drive mechanism 906 with the vertical direction as an axis. The lever 906c includes a first arm 906i extending from the pin connecting part 906h toward the movable member 906a, and a second arm 906j extending from the pin connecting part 906h toward the connecting part 906m. The first arm 906i and the second arm 906j has a substantially orthogonal L-shape.

  Although not shown, a slide hole (similar to the slide hole 910i) having an opening extending in the front-rear direction is provided at a position where the movable member 906a overlaps the first arm 906i in the vertical direction. A rod (similar to the rod 910g) that enters the slide hole is provided at a position facing the slide hole. Similarly, a slide hole (similar to the slide hole 910i) having an opening extending in the left-right direction is provided at a position where the connection portion 906m overlaps the second arm 906j from above and below, and the slide of the second arm 906j is performed. A rod (similar to the rod 910g) that enters the slide hole is provided at a position facing the hole.

  Therefore, when the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is driven in the state of FIG. 73B (a), the rod 906k and the connecting portion 906m are drawn toward the lever solenoid 906b (86b) (rear).

  At this time, the second arm 906j receives a force pulled backward from the connecting portion 906m via a rod (not shown) connected to the second arm 906j, but the rod (not shown) slides on the connecting portion 906m. A hole (not shown) allows the camera to move in the left-right direction. Therefore, the second arm 906j is rotatable around the pin coupling portion 906h, and can transmit the rotating power accompanying the rotation to the first arm 906i.

  The rod (not shown) of the first arm 906i that has entered the slide hole (not shown) of the movable member 906a can transmit the rotational force received from the second arm 906j to the movable member 906a. ) Can be moved in the front-rear direction by the slide holes (not shown). Therefore, the first arm 906i can transmit the horizontal component of the rotational force received from the second arm 906j to the movable member 906a with little resistance.

  Accordingly, when the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is driven in the state of FIG. 73B (a), the lever 906c rotates around the pin coupling portion 906h, and the movable member 906a is inserted as shown in FIG. 73B (b). It can be moved in a direction to be retracted into the hole 906n. In this state, when the driving of the lever solenoid 906b (86b) is stopped, the rod 906k and the connecting portion 906m are extended in the front direction by the urging force of the urging spring (not shown) provided in the lever solenoid 906b (86b). As a result, the lever 906c is rotated in the opposite direction, and the movable member 906a can be moved in a direction to be fed out from the insertion hole 906n to the branch portion 906e.

  In addition, when the displacement of the first arm 906i in the front-rear direction is small when the lever 906c is rotated and the movable member 906a can tolerate the displacement, the first arm 906i may be pin-coupled to the movable member. Similarly, when the displacement of the second arm 906j in the left-right direction is small and the lever solenoid 906b (86) can tolerate the displacement, the second arm 906j may be pin-coupled to the connection portion 906m.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable member 906 a is moved to the operating position outside the first inflow path 917 by driving the movable portion drive mechanism 906 (the lever solenoid 906 b (86 b)). Accordingly, when the driving of the movable portion driving mechanism 906 is stopped, the movable member 906a is always disposed at the normal position in the first inflow path 917, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from abruptly winning the specific area switch 72. .

  Here, the branch portion 906e (specific area 86) has a width (width in the left-right direction) that is about the diameter of a game ball and that allows the game ball to pass through (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the lever solenoid 906b is driven (FIG. 73B (b)), the movable member 906a needs to be in a state where it is almost housed at least to the right from the insertion hole 906n (a state where it is disengaged from the first inflow path 917). .

  On the other hand, when the lever solenoid 906b is stopped (FIG. 73B (a)), the distance between the tip of the movable member 906a on the left side (side of the branch portion 906e) and the left end of the branch portion 906e (bottle to the specific area 86). If the neck width becomes smaller than at least the diameter of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the specific area 86 (first inflow path 917).

  Therefore, it is preferable that the moving amount of the movable member 906a is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, for example, about the radius of the game ball (see FIG. 74). As a result, the extension amount of the lever solenoid 906b can be shortened, so that the power consumption of the lever solenoid 906b can be reduced.

  In addition, the shape of the special winning opening unit 800 including the movable member 906a may be a shape that is turned left and right as viewed from the front. In this case, the movable member 906a moves to the left when the large-entry-splash-portion driving mechanism 910 is driven, and is disposed outside the first inflow path. It moves rightward and is arranged in the first inflow path 917.

[Inflow path of gaming balls in the special winning opening unit]
FIG. 74 is a front view of the special winning opening unit 800, showing a state in which the V switch is not allowed to enter the ball. FIG. 75 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 74. FIG. 76 is a front view of the special winning opening unit 800, showing a state where a V switch can be entered. FIG. 77 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the large entry unit base 902 includes an upper left channel 902a, an upper right channel 902b, and a general winning opening 35 as channels into which game balls flow. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 as described above is discharged outside from the general winning opening discharge passage 908b through the winning opening switch 35a (FIGS. 72 and 75).

  A blade member 914a is arranged at a position where the upper left flow path 902a and the upper right flow path 902b of the large input unit base 902 meet. The blade member 914a (broken line) closes the special winning opening 902h in an initial state (for example, a normal game state). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the upper left channel 902a or the upper right channel 902b flows into the lower right channel 902d and is discharged to the outside without winning the large winning opening 902h.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result (big hit), or when the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is a special result (big hit, small hit), the blade member 914a The (solid line) is rotated to open the special winning opening 902h for a predetermined time, so that the game ball can enter the special winning opening 902h.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 and 77, the path of the game ball that has won the special winning opening 902h flows down along the inclined surface of the blade member 914a and flows into the special winning opening switch 43 (39a). 43 (39a), falls to reach the branch portion 906e, flows down along the inclined surface 915 inclined forward of the branch portion 906e, flows into the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86), and flows into the specific area switch 72. There is a first inflow path 917 that passes through 72 and discharges outside.

  Further, as another path, an inclined surface 906p that is branched from the first inflow path 917 by the movable member 906a disposed between the special winning opening switch 43 (39a) and the branch portion 906e, and is inclined rearward of the movable member 906a. There is a second inflow path 918 that flows down according to the rear upper end face 916 to flow into the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, passes through the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and discharges to the outside.

  The first inflow path 917 is disposed so as to face the front from a branch point with the second inflow path 918, and the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86) is disposed at a position facing the front. Thereby, the visibility of the specific area switch 72 (V switch) can be secured.

  In the initial state shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the movable member 906a is extended on the branch portion 906e. At this time, the opening of the special winning opening switch 43 (39a) through which the game ball passes faces the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a when viewed from above. Therefore, the game ball that has passed the special winning opening switch 43 (39a) comes into contact with the movable member 906a and is introduced into the second inflow path 918, flows down to the rear upper end surface 916 according to the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a, and remains. The ball passes through the ball outlet switch 73.

  In the driving state shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the movable member 906a is not disposed on the branch portion 906e. At this time, most of the opening of the special winning opening switch 43 (39a) through which the game ball passes faces the inclined surface 915 of the branch portion 906e. Accordingly, the game ball that has passed through the special winning opening switch 43 (39a) abuts on the branch portion 906e and remains in the first inflow path 917, flows down along the inclined surface 915 of the branch portion 906e, and passes through the specific area switch 72. Will pass.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 77, the movable member 906a has a cross-sectional shape (a shape viewed from the left-right direction) having a chevron shape (or a triangular shape), and an inclined surface having one side inclined rearward. 906p. Thus, the movable member 906a can be formed in a simple shape. The insertion hole 906n is open in a shape that follows the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the movable member 906a. Thereby, rattling during the operation of the movable member 906a can be reduced.

  By the way, a movable part drive mechanism 906 (lever solenoid 906b (86b)) for driving the movable member 906a, and a large flap part drive mechanism 910 (a flies part drive solenoid 910b (39b)) for driving the large winning opening flap part 914 are provided. Are controlled by the game control device 100 (see FIG. 79). Then, the game control device 100 synchronizes the driving of the movable portion driving mechanism 906 with the driving of the large-entry splash portion driving mechanism 910. Specifically, when a specific type of jackpot (such as a probable variable jackpot) is won with a predetermined probability, the large-entry-splash-part driving mechanism 910 is driven and movable in a predetermined (for example, first) jackpot round. The unit driving mechanism 906 is driven (see the fifth embodiment). In this case, the movable part driving mechanism 906 is driven simultaneously with the driving of the large entering part driving mechanism 910, or the movable part driving mechanism 906 is driven immediately before the driving of the large entering part driving mechanism 910.

  As a result, since the movable portion driving mechanism 906 does not drive after the large-entry splash portion driving mechanism 910 is driven, the movable member 906a is driven at the timing when the game ball passing through the large winning port 902h passes through the movable member 906a. As a result, it is possible to avoid such a problem that the movable member 906a bites the game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the LED board 902m is arranged on the front surface of the special winning opening unit 800, but is arranged on the right side of the specific area 86. Thus, the LED substrate 902m does not impair the visibility of the specific area 86. In addition, since the LED board 902m is not arranged on the back (rear) of the specific area switch 72, the LED board 902m does not prevent the game ball from passing to the specific area switch 72.

  In the special winning opening unit 800, the mounting position of the specific area switch 72 (specific area 86) (first inflow path 917) and the mounting position of the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 (second inflow path 918) may be exchanged. . In this case, when the movable portion driving mechanism 906 is driven, the movable member 906a is disposed in the first inflow path 917, the game ball flows into the specific area switch 72, and when the driving of the movable portion driving mechanism 906 is stopped, the movable member 906a is moved. 906 a is disposed outside the first inflow path 917, and the game ball flows into the remaining ball outlet switch 73. Thereby, the game mode of the gaming machine 10 can be easily changed.

[Operation and Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10 including the specific area 86 into which a game ball can flow in a special game state generated when a result of a game (variable display game) is a special result, Detecting means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73) capable of detecting that a game ball has passed into a region which can flow in the special game state and is different from the specific region 86 (specific region switch 72); And a movable member 906a disposed upstream of the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) and the detection means (remaining sphere discharge port switch 73). The game ball can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) by operating in one direction, and the movable member 906a operates in the other direction in the left-right direction. Game ball to the means (residual ball outlet switch 73) out, characterized in that can flow.

  In a conventional gaming machine, there is a movable member that operates to flow a game ball into a specific area (specific area 86) and that moves in the front-rear direction. If vibrations or impacts are applied to the movable member from the front of the gaming machine, the movable member may be displaced at an unintended timing and the game ball may flow into a specific area. On the other hand, it is conceivable to provide a detecting means for detecting vibration, impact, and the like (injustice) from the front of the gaming machine, but it is costly. Further, by moving the movable member in the front-rear direction, it is easy to visually recognize that the vehicle has passed the specific area (V switch), but it is weak against vibrations and impacts from the front of the gaming machine, and the game is vulnerable to fraud. Machine.

  However, according to the above configuration, since the moving direction of the movable member 906a is the left-right direction, the movable member 906a is not displaced by vibration or impact from the front direction, and is resistant to vibration and impact. Therefore, by avoiding unintended displacement of the movable member 906a, the gaming machine 10 is resistant to fraudulent acts on the movable member 906a.

  In the fourth embodiment, a first inflow path 917 for allowing a game ball to flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) is provided, and the movable member 906a operates in one direction and is disposed outside the first inflow path 917. This allows the game ball to flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72), and operates in the other direction to be placed in the first inflow path 917 to play the game on the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73). It is characterized in that a sphere can flow. Thereby, the inflow destination of the game ball can be changed by a simple operation of the movable member 906a.

  In the fourth embodiment, there is provided a second inflow path 918 for branching from the middle of the first inflow path 917 and allowing game balls to flow into the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73), and the movable member 906a is provided with a first inflow path. 917 is arranged at a branch position with the second inflow path 918, operates in one direction, and is arranged outside the first inflow path 917, so that game balls can flow into the first inflow path 917, and the other direction. And a path (a path formed by the inclined surface 906p of the movable member 906a) for causing the game balls to flow from the first inflow path 917 to the second inflow path 918 by being disposed in the first inflow path 917. It is characterized by doing. Thus, the inflow destination of the game ball can be reliably changed by the simple operation of the movable member 906a.

  The fourth embodiment is characterized in that the first inflow path 917 is disposed so as to extend from the branch position (with the second inflow path 918) toward the front of the gaming machine 10. Thereby, the visibility of the specific area switch 72 (V switch) can be secured.

  In the fourth embodiment, the upper surface of the movable member 906a is provided with an inclined surface 906p inclined toward the second inflow path 918. This allows a game ball to flow from the movable member 906a to the second flow path 918 with a simple configuration.

  In the fourth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the movable member 906a is triangular or chevron-shaped, and is provided with a side related to the inclined surface 906p. Thus, the movable member 906a can be constructed with a simple shape.

  In the fourth embodiment, a first driving unit (movable unit driving mechanism 906) for operating (driving) the movable member 906a is provided, and the first driving unit (movable unit driving mechanism 906) drives the movable member 906a by driving. It is characterized by being moved out of the first inflow path 917. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls from unexpectedly flowing into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72).

  In the fourth embodiment, the driving direction of the first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906) is the front-back direction of the gaming machine 10, and the first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906) controls the force in the front-rear direction. It is connected to the movable member 906a via a first link mechanism (lever 906c) that converts the force into a directional force. Thereby, for example, it is possible to secure a visible area of the game ball arranged in front of the first driving means (movable part driving mechanism 906) (the front surface of the special winning opening unit 800).

  In the fourth embodiment, the width of the first inflow path 917 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball, and is a size that allows the game ball to flow, and the moving length of the movable member 906a is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is also short. Accordingly, power consumption and driving time (moving time of the movable member 906a) can be reduced by shortening the driving length (stroke length) of the first driving unit (movable part driving mechanism 906).

  In the fourth embodiment, the game ball is detected by the detecting means (in the case where the mounting positions of the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) and the detecting means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73) are exchanged). ) Is provided, and the movable member 906a operates in one direction and is disposed outside the first inflow path 917 so that the game ball flows into the detection means (remaining ball discharge port switch 73). It is possible that the game ball can flow into the specific area 86 (specific area switch 72) by operating in the other direction and being arranged in the first inflow path 917. Thereby, the game mode of the gaming machine 10 can be easily changed.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the special gaming state, a wing member (large winning opening splash portion 914) that rotates in the direction of the board surface of the gaming machine 10 so as to introduce a game ball into the first inflow path 917, and a wing member (large) A second driving means (large-entry splash part driving mechanism 910) for rotating the winning opening splash part 914), and the driving direction of the second driving means (large-entry splash part driving mechanism 910) is In the up-down direction, the second drive means (large-entry splash portion drive mechanism 910) converts the force in the up-down direction into a rotational force in the direction of the board surface through a second link mechanism (cam mechanism 910d), and the wing member (large win). (Spring portion 914). Thereby, the second driving means (large-entry splash part driving mechanism 910) and the wing member (large-winning-prize opening splash part 914) are not displaced by vibration, impact, or the like from the front surface. Can be avoided.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the special gaming state, a wing member (large winning opening splash portion 914) that rotates in the direction of the board surface of the gaming machine 10 so as to introduce a game ball into the first inflow path 917, and a wing member (large) The second drive means (large-entry splash part drive mechanism 910) for rotating the winning opening splash part 914), the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906), and the second drive means (large entrance splash part drive mechanism 910) And a game control means (game control device 100) for driving the first drive means (movable part drive mechanism 906). It is synchronized with the driving of the unit driving mechanism 910).

  Thus, it is possible to prevent the movable portion drive mechanism 906 from being driven after the large splash portion drive mechanism 910 is driven, and the game ball that has passed through the large winning port 902h is movable at the timing of passing through the movable member 906a. It is possible to avoid such a problem that the member 906a is driven and the movable member 906a bites the game ball.

  In the fourth embodiment, a housing (a large input unit base 902, an intermediate member 904, and the like) that includes a specific area 86 (a specific area switch 72), a detection unit (a remaining ball discharge port switch 73), and a first inflow path 917. The winning opening discharge unit 908 is combined), and the housing is provided with a general winning opening 35 and a distribution channel (general winning opening discharge passage 908b) of the game ball winning the general winning opening 35. As a result, the entire unit can be reduced in size, and the occupied area (volume) of the game area 32 can be reduced.

  In the fourth embodiment, the special winning opening unit 800 may be associated with the effect described in the second embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front view of the gaming board of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, showing a state in which the state shown in FIG. 37 shifts to a special gaming state. As shown in FIG. 78, when a large hit (special game state) occurs from a probability change state (a state in which a small hit rush can be generated), a virtual line replaces the arrow image 619 and the effect image 617 as shown in FIG. An arrow image 619a crossing (orthogonal to) 822 can be displayed. The arrow image 619a has, for example, an arrow shape extending from the position overlapping the virtual line 822 toward the special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker), with the tip pointing to the special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker). Further, in conjunction with the display of the arrow image 619a, for example, the promotion information 619b composed of the wording of “aim” can be displayed. The promotion information 619b is displayed at, for example, substantially the same position as the effect image 617. By displaying in this manner, the object to be watched by the player when shifting from the probability change state to the special game state is switched from the special winning opening unit 806 to the special winning opening unit 800, and the player is gazing in the positive change state. Since the display relating to the special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker) is performed in the portion where the player has played, the player does not miss these displays and is instructed to "Aim for the special winning opening unit 800 (V attacker)". Can be easily recognized.

  In FIG. 78, a specific type of big hit (probably variable big hit, etc.) has occurred, and the special game state remains in the certain change state (small hit rush possible state), so the mode display section 674 (first suggestion information) Keeps the “tiger mode” so as to notify the user of a certain change state (small hit rush) after the end of the special game state. That is, in FIG. 78, the mode display unit 674 (first suggestion information) keeps displaying the effect mode related to the “tiger mode” even when the mode is shifted from the certainty change state to the special game state. In addition, regardless of the game state after the end of the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state, at the time of the transition, the display of the “tiger mode” was deleted and the “tiger mode” was displayed. At the position, an arbitrary word indicating that the game is in the special game state, such as “tiger bonus”, may be displayed.

  Note that the effect of the arrow image 619a and the promotion information 619b in FIG. 78 is effective when the V winning occurs immediately after the start of the special game state, so that the V winning can be achieved in the first big hit round. It is preferable to drive the movable member 906a. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and the movable member 906a may be driven in a round other than the first big hit round.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 111. The fifth embodiment relates to the configuration of the game control device 100 and details of the game control, and the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the details of the effect control. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as the embodiments from the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components having the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are appropriately omitted.

[Game control device]
FIG. 79 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board). The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). CPU section 110 having an input port, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110 with the input section 120 and the output section 130. Etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. Oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a 32 V DC voltage. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. With the provision, the cost can be reduced by excluding the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly set. Is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotation operation or the like to change a probability set value (set value) according to a setting related to a game condition (game). Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability set value is a set value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, but other game conditions (effects, etc.) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability set value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing settings (probability set values) relating to game conditions. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a dedicated set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

  The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 or adjacent to the game control device 100, so that the operation is performed unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. It is placed in an inaccessible location (an inaccessible location). That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

  As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value in accordance with the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting check state (setting check mode) in which a probability set value can be checked.

  In the present embodiment, the probability setting values are defined, for example, in six stages, and are set at probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), and probability setting value 4 (setting 4), a probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and a probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

  In the probability setting change process, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) → Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) ) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) →. Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For the sake of explanation, during the setting change state (setting change mode), work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. The values may be arranged in a numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) and handled as the same (the set value for work and the set probability value are set to the same numerical value).

  Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (set value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability set value. Further, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. Then, the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting value of 0 to 5 is, for example, a performance display device 152 which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111b stores invariable information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, and the like) for game control in a nonvolatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random numbers at the time of game control, and stores information related to the game (game information), and stores and retains the stored information even if a power failure occurs. Can be a holding storage means. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  The ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meets the condition of the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (Excluding the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N-reach) as a reach effect system (kind) having a different possibility (different degree of expectation) from which a special result mode (big hit mode) is derived, Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) of the jackpot is set to be higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit occurs). In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a small jackpot for determining the small jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a pattern random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including an execution time of the fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display without various reach or reach), and the like. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  In addition, in the process related to the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure change display game as the current game state, For example, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111a forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball rental.

  An input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34 a of the general-purpose starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning port 36. The switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37 (ordinary variable winning device), the winning port switch 35a of the general winning port 35, the large winning port switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (lower winning port). The switch is connected to the mouth switch 38a and the top winning port switch 39a). A negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is inputted, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is inputted. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for conversion is provided.

  Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage (V winning) of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through a remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been fired into the game area and have finished playing.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining sphere discharge port switch 73, or the out sphere detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

  In addition, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like, and detects a glass frame opening provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the like. A switch 63, a signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (body frame), and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibration of the gaming machine 10 are input. .

  The second input port 123 receives a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a not-shown test shooting device via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the third input port 124 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating an insufficient game ball before payout, and an overflow. A first input port 122 which takes in an overflow switch signal, a touch switch signal based on an input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and a signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (that is, when the game balls are full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not it is.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. However, each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is impossible.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. I have. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 has a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) for opening the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and opening / closing data for the lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86 Two output ports 134 are provided.

  The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid driving signal, and outputs the first driver (driving). Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the current 50, and a fourth driver that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

  32 V DC is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138 a in order to drive a solenoid operated at 32 V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134 and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of seven-segment displays (eight-segment displays including the dot Dp) (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

  The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided in another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display the display probability set value, the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of ejected balls.

  Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls passing through the winning opening (the number of winning) and the game passing through the out opening 30b. It is the sum with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting (counting) the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 and the like. In the present embodiment, the winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning ports) are included.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of awarded balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls), and is calculated by (acquired ball number / number of discharged balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of obtained balls per 100 discharged balls (total number of award balls).

  For example, the ratio of the bonuses may be determined as the big hit state in the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls obtained for each role) obtained by winning the special winning opening (= the so-called continuous role ratio). It should be noted that the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big winning opening (= big winning opening ratio) among all the winning balls. Or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called common use ratio (total common use ratio) )).

(Direction control device)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 are provided.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speakers 19 a and 19 b provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speakers 19 c and 19 d provided on the front frame 12. The sound generated by the sound source LSI 314 is output from the upper speakers 19a and 19b and the lower speakers 19c and 19d via the amplifier circuit 337.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via the command I / F 331 are converted into a production control command signal (production command). As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. Note that the board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 690f provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the volume control provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of the switch 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging a hit in a general figure based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34 and reads the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and it is judged whether or not the normal figure change display game is hit.

  Then, after the identification symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display, a general symbol fluctuating display game in which the symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the general fluctuating display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the general fluctuating display, the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuating winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, The opening control is performed as described above (for 0.3 second). That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). When the result of the general-floor variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out-of-position on the general-purpose display.

  In addition, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is stored based on the starting memory. A random number for use is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game is hit or not.

  In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the random number value for the big hit determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has been hit.

  Then, the CPU 111 a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure change display game is displayed in which the identification symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stop-displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning region (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37). Make

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing for setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a to 19d, controlling the emission of various LEDs, and the like based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure change display game is a hit. Let it. In the processing for generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls the large winning opening solenoid 39b to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39, for example, to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. .

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until such condition is achieved is defined as one round (R), and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15, 11, or 2) (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that performs control to open and close the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state (probable change state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. In the time-saving state, control is performed so that the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 are in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 per unit time is more controlled than when the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 is in the normal operation state. The control is performed so that the opening time of the battery is substantially increased, so that the power transmission support state is set. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) except the latent probability change state, the time reduction state is duplicated and the general power support (electric support) is executed.

  For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to perform a time-reduction variation in which the execution time (the general-purpose variation time) of the general-purpose variation display game is changed to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time reduction state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction change of the special figure change display game is also executed.

  Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). It is.

  Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal-floating display game is hit and the normal-variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal-power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control so as to be longer than the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening (for example, four times). Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of the winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of general power release times, the general power release time, and the general figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased compared to the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, the setting may be made so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. In addition, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transition state at power-on]
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power is restored). As described above, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on and off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

  First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability set value (set value) can be changed. (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 82B and FIG. 84).

  Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, a transition is made to a setting check state (setting check mode) in which the probability set value can be checked (FIG. 82B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 84).

  If the setting key switch 93 is turned off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on when the power is turned on, a transition is made to a RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), and RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) is performed. The processing is executed, and the RAM 111c is initialized (see A1042 to 1044 in FIG. 82B).

  If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 82A and 82B, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 83 which is performed at a predetermined time period (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 includes a main program (calling routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. .

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 82A and FIG. 82B are flowcharts showing a procedure of a main process by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “A ****”.

  As shown in FIG. 82A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs is executed (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibition state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibition state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, so that the firing of game balls is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of a sub control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as a main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the device is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The time of the power supply delay timer is measured by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the elapse of the standby time, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the counting of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a power failure has occurred by reading a power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and a data bus. (A1008). If a power failure has occurred (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the game machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  If no power failure has occurred (result of A1008 is “N”), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1009) and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control device 100 reads / writes RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. The access to the memory is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in the game microcomputer 111 in advance and used in the present embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (A1013) ).

  Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In the present embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

  Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c) (A1015). Here, a flag on the assumption of abnormality is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (the result of A1016 is “Y”), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

  Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM is cleared (A1020). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of Step A1021.

  Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1016 is “N” or result of A1017 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is “N”), the process shifts to the process of step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change of steps A1027 to A1037. .

  When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c). It is determined whether or not it has been performed (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the probability setting change flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A1023 is “N”), the process of checking the probability setting (during the setting check state, in the setting check mode) in steps A1031 to A1037, and the processing in steps A1041 to 1044. The RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) or the processing at steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 when power is normally turned on (when power is restored) is executed.

  When the probability setting change flag is set (result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 notifies the game control apparatus 100 (main board, main board) that there is an abnormality in the main abnormality. An error notification command is transmitted to effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the main error error notification command notifies that the game control device 100 has an error.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 outputs the 7-segment display data at the time of the game stop (data of the error display of “E1”) to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 for display on the performance display device 152 (A1025). . Then, it outputs on data of a security signal for notifying an external device (such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) or an information collecting terminal) of an abnormality to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are kept in the off state. After that, the processing in steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and then the setting is changed again (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) and the power is turned on. While the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), and a timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing. (FIG. 83) cannot be executed, so that the game (special figure change display game, ordinary figure change display game) cannot be executed.

  As described above, it is determined that an abnormality occurs when the probability setting change flag is set even though the setting change operation (the operation of turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not performed. , A1024-A1026. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted during the change of the probability setting (before the setting change is completed), the flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed may be set even though the setting change operation has not been performed. is there.

  On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 provides a main abnormality error notification for notifying that the game control device 100 (main board) has an abnormality. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1") at the time of the game stop is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the RAM is stored in the external device. In order to notify the abnormality, the ON data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Note that, similarly to the above, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are maintained in the off state. Thereafter, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and the process stands by.

  When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (result of A1027 is “Y”), the probability set value stored in the probability set value area of the RAM 111c is cleared because it is unknown whether the probability set value is correct or not. Then, after setting the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028), the probability setting change flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1027 is “N”), the probability setting change flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command in the process of changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command that the probability setting is being changed notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

  In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”). If the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is “Y”), the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, and the process during the probability setting confirmation (during the setting confirmation state) starts, A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command under the probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the flow shifts to the process of step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

  After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the change of the probability setting and the confirmation of the probability setting.

  First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal during the change of the probability setting and the confirmation of the probability setting (A1034). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in a probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 84) described later. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). During the change of the probability setting and the confirmation of the probability setting, the security signal is output for at least 50 ms.

  Next, the game control device 100 permits an interrupt (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 83) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the processing at the time of the power failure occurrence in steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

  As described above, as long as the setting key switch 93 is ON and a power failure does not occur, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability set value can be changed, or the probability set value can be confirmed. The setting check state (setting check mode) is continued.

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A1036 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prohibits the interruption (A1038), and issues a notification end command to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the notification end command ends notification that probability setting is being confirmed or notification that probability setting is being changed.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting change flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1040). If the probability setting change flag is set (result of A1040 is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, the RAM initialization processing (described later) in steps A1042 to A1044 is executed. I do. On the other hand, when the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A1040 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being checked, the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform normal processing of.

  When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set value in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability set value stored in the probability set value area. Further, the probability setting change flag described above is also cleared here. Here, in addition to the probability set value area, a configuration in which the stack area and the unused area are not cleared, and a configuration in which the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared are also possible. . The performance information is derived based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning, and includes, for example, a payout rate, a base value (a payout rate in a normal game state), an accessory ratio, a discharge ball count, and the like. is there.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A1043). Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the flow shifts to the process of step A1047.

  On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is “N”), the game control device 100 returns the normal power supply because the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both off. The process at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure restoration process is executed (A1045). For example, an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at the time of power restoration) is saved in an area to be initialized. Also, the above-described probability setting confirmation flag is cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047 is performed. Move to the processing of.

  The command for initializing the RAM transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for restoring the power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine and a hold of the special figures 1 and 2. Special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating number, probability information command indicating presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure change in predetermined effect mode An effect number information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on are included.

  Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of restoration from power failure include a set value information command (probability set value information command) indicating set value information which is information of a probability set value (set value) of the gaming machine 10. It is. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. Production control can be performed.

  The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and informs the RAM initialization (RAM clear) using the LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the like and the sound of the speaker 30. Perform for seconds. In addition, the command at the time of restoration from the power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display content of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is a customer waiting demonstration command when the special figures 1 and 2 are both being processed normally (when they are not fluctuating or hitting), and otherwise are restoration screen commands.

  After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method of transposing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and sets various corresponding initial value random numbers (the big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of small hit symbol random number that determines small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of hit random number that determines hit of ordinary figure (hit initial value random number) As a start value of the initial value of the random number of the falling lottery used in the falling lottery (initial random number of the falling lottery) and the like, it is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and interruption is permitted (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the falling lottery random number is configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit. I have. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the drop lottery random number are timer interrupts which are processing units of the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle as the process (a different CTC (CTC2) from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process).

  In addition, the so-called "initial value changing method" is used for the big hit symbol random number, the hit symbol random number, and the drop lottery random number, in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits the interruption (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing the performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (such as an accessory ratio or a payout ratio) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). Thereafter, the interruption is permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 83) can be executed.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. Thereby, the processing of steps A1050 to A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

  When a power failure occurs (result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing when a power failure occurs, temporarily prohibits interruption (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first specifies the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets a higher address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing for inputting signals from various sensors and switches and capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is “Y”), a probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

  When neither the probability setting is changed nor the probability setting is confirmed (result of A1304 is "N"), the game control device 100 controls the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) based on the output data set in various processes. An output process for performing drive control of the actuator or the like is executed (A1306). Note that, when a firing prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to a state in which the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), and further performs a random number update process 1 (A1308). Processing 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning port switch 38a, the upper winning port switch 39a, whether or not there is a normal signal input, and monitoring of an error. A winning port switch / state monitoring process for performing (for example, whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) is executed (A1310).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring at the special winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set in the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. If abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is “Y”), the processing after step A1317 is executed.

  When the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs a start-up switch monitoring process of monitoring a winning in the start-up opening by the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a. Execute (A1312). Subsequently, a special figure 1 game process for performing a process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and then a special figure 2 game process for performing a process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a general-purpose game process for performing a process relating to the general-purpose change display game (A1315). A segment LED editing process is provided to drive the segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure changing game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1316).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet illegality monitoring process of checking a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio fraud monitoring process (panel radio fraud monitoring process) for determining whether there is any abnormality by checking a detection signal from the radio sensor 62 of the gaming board is executed (A1318).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process of monitoring fraud by vibration based on an input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the special winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special winning switch 38 (lower winning switch 38a, upper winning switch 39a), the special area switch 72 (V winning switch, V switch) and the remaining in the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 remain. Based on the input from the ball discharge port switch 73, abnormal discharge of the special fluctuation winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when abnormal discharge occurs, an abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set. The game balls that have passed through the special winning switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning switch, V switch) or the remaining ball discharge switch 73.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1321). Then, a performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing ends.

  When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank specification are automatically performed. However, depending on the CPU used, the interruption is permitted after the external information editing processing. May be performed, or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability set value can be changed or confirmed.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability set value here is stored in the probability set value area of the RAM 111c.

  When the probability set value is within the normal range (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and sets the performance display device 152. Is output via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is “N”), the light-off data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

  Here, the probability set value display data is data of a display probability set value displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among persons involved in the hall, etc., if the probability setting value is different, if the same big hit probability (and small hit probability) is used, the display probability set value is associated with the big hit probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 unless the security signal control timer is 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, on data of a security signal for notifying an external device (such as a game arcade internal management device (a hall computer)) of an abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are maintained in the off state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

  When the probability setting change flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 performs the first timer interrupt processing after power-on. It is determined whether or not (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

  When it is not the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

  When there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. In addition to the +1 update, the probability set values 1 to 6 in the probability set value area are updated by +1 corresponding to the work set value (A2410). Thus, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability set value in the probability set value area is updated by one. Thereafter, the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. Note that a value corresponding to the probability set value read from the probability set value area (1 from the probability set value) is stored in a work set value area (in the RAM 111c or a register) for storing a work set value when the setting change mode is entered. (Subtracted value) may be stored.

  In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability set value in the probability set value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work set value. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the setting value for the operation is stored in the area. The value corresponding to the work setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. With this configuration, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (result of A1037 is “Y”), the probability setting value used for game control, effect control, and the like (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) Value) can be prevented from being changed with an unintended value.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start-up switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a start-up opening 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (start-up opening 1) (A2701), and obtains a hard random number acquisition process for obtaining a hard random number as a jackpot random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not the first opening winning opening 36 has a winning opening (A2703). If there is no start opening winning (the result of A2703 is "N"), the flow shifts to the process of step A2709.

  When there is a start opening winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 is in a state where the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a low probability state and there is no time reduction (generic power support) Is determined (A2704). That is, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the special figure low probability & no time saving period (in the normal game state) (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (in a normal game state). Then, in the case of the low probability state and the state without time saving (the result of A2704 is “Y”), that is, in the case of the normal gaming state, the flow shifts to the process of step A2707.

  The game control device 100 determines that the jackpot occurrence probability is not the low probability state (the case of the high probability state) or the state with the time saving (the state with the ordinary power support) (the result of A2704 is “N”). A right-turn instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). Thus, when there is a start opening prize to the first start winning opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state, the effect control device 300 displays a right-hand instruction display for instructing a right-hand as a warning as the display device 41. Can be displayed. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by winning in the first starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2707), and executes a special figure starting port switch common process (A2708). ).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning port, starting port 2) (A2709), and sets a hard random number as a jackpot random number. A hard random number acquisition process to be acquired is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize to the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 (A2711). When there is no start opening winning (the result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

  When there is a start opening prize to the normal variable prize device 37 (result of A2711 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal variable prize device 37 is in operation (during normal power operation). A determination is made (A2712). If the normal variable prize device 37 is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a fraud (normal telephone fraud) on the normal variable prize device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of unauthorized winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of unauthorized occurrence determinations (for example, five or more), it can be determined that general telephone fraud is occurring. If the fraud on the normal variable prize device 37 is occurring (result of A2713 is “Y”), the start-up switch monitoring process ends.

  The game control device 100 sets a table for setting information of suspension by winning in the normal variable prize device 37 (starting port 2) when the fraud on the normal variable prize device 37 is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”). It prepares (A2714), executes the special figure startup port switch common processing (A2715), and ends the startup port switch monitoring processing.

  When an irregularity with respect to the normal variable prize device 37 is occurring (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not execute the process of step A2713, but executes the processes of steps A2714 and A2715.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special drawing starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first outputs information on the number of winnings to the monitored start-up switch among the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output frequency area of the RWM (A2904), and the flow shifts to the process of step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (the number of start storages) corresponding to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target opening opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates an address of a random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. It is saved in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a drop lottery random number for selecting a fall from the high probability state of the jackpot probability of the special map to the low probability state (A2912), and stores the fall lottery random number. It is saved in the area (A2913).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a prize to the normal variable prize device 37 (starting port 2) (A2914). If it is not a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 (result of A2914 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A2917. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A2914 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2915) and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2916). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2917), and executes a special figure reservation information determination process (A2918). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2919), and effect command setting processing (A2920) is executed to execute the special figure start port switch common. The process ends. The decoration special figure reservation number command is a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command for the opening 1 switch 36a, and a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command for the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  The special figure reservation information determination processing (A2918) is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 start storage generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning apparatus 37. In the special figure suspension information determination processing, look-ahead determining execution information (including stop symbol information) of the special figure variable display game before the special figure variable display game based on the special figure 1 and 2 start memories is executed. Processing (prior determination processing) is executed. In the special figure hold information determination process, the look-ahead stop symbol command for low probability (low probability) and / or the look-ahead stop symbol command for high probability (high) corresponding to the target start switch and the determined stop symbol information. Probability) is prepared as an effect command, a look-ahead change pattern command corresponding to a change pattern number (determined) indicating a change mode of the special figure change display game is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. In the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game often has a long time fluctuation (long fluctuation) and is forcibly terminated with a miss result as described later. It is not necessary to execute the prefetching process (prior determination process).

  Note that when the effect control device 300 receives both the prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) and the prefetch stop symbol command (high probability), the prefetch stop symbol if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is a low probability state. Execute the look-ahead symbol command processing using the command (low probability), and execute the look-ahead symbol command processing using the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in the high probability state. May do it.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning prize port 36 or the start winning prize area of the normal variable winning device 37, and has the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start storage up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (A3201).

  If the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 It is determined whether the state is in the state or the small hit state (A3202). When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3202 is “N”), a special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, a specific area switch specific area switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

  Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A3205). The special figure 1 game processing timer is clocked for the interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interruption processing by updating -1. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. In the case of the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3202 is “Y”), the processing of step A3205 is performed without performing the processing of steps A3203 and A3204. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3206 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3217.

  If the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, the game control apparatus 100 sets the special figure 1 game processing number to A special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3207). Further, a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is obtained using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed using the special figure 1 game processing number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number (A3209).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A3209, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, sets the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, and sets the effect. In addition, special figure 1 ordinary processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 changing processing is executed (A3210). The details of the special map 1 ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “1” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process, and the like. The processing during special figure 1 fluctuation to be performed is executed (A3211). The details of the special figure 1 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “2” in step A3209, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, The special figure 1 displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern of each big hit and setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval is executed (A3212).

  In the special figure 1 display processing, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, a hit symbol command corresponding to the big hit symbol is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as a production command, and the big hit fanfare is performed. A command is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. Subsequently, a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set, and the big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Then, "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the fanfare / interval processing, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area, and the general figure is set in the general figure game mode flag area. Save no time reduction flag. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal processing to shift to the special figure 1 normal processing, and the processing is performed in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save the number.

  If the game processing number is “3” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and updates the information necessary for performing the special winning opening process. A fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3213). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “4” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the last round, and sets an ending command if the big hit round is the last round, A special winning opening opening process for setting information necessary for performing the special winning opening residual ball processing is executed (A3214).

  When the game processing number is “5” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets a time interval and an ending time, and sets information necessary for performing a jackpot ending process. The remaining mouth ball processing is executed (A3215).

  If the game processing number is “6” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or sets information necessary to execute the special figure 1 ordinary processing. Then, the special figure 1 big hit ending process for setting (S3216) is executed.

  In the special figure 1 big hit end process, when the time reduction determination data (described later) set at the time of starting the special figure 1 variable display game is data without time saving, in order to shift to the normal game state after the big hit end. The big hit end setting processing 1 is executed, and if the time reduction determination data is data with a time saving, the big hit end setting processing 2 is executed to shift to the time saving state after the big hit end. However, if there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the big hit end setting processing 3 is performed in order to shift to the probability change state (probability change state) after the big hit end. Execute Further, in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, "0" is set as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

  In addition, in the case of the probability change big hit which becomes the probability change state after the big hit end, in the predetermined (for example, the first) big hit round, the specific area 86 is opened for a long time, and the specific area switch 72 is set to the game ball to the specific area 86. (V winning) is reliably detected.

  In the big hit end setting process 1, the normal figure game time flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area, and the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. The no-figure time-saving flag indicates that the time-reduction fluctuating state of the fuji-figure display game is not in the time reduction state (the time reduction state, the normal power support state). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the jackpot probability is low and not in the time saving state (general power support state). After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction fluctuation count area to zero.

  In the big hit end setting process 2, a flag for saving a normal figure time saving is saved in a general figure game mode flag area, and a special figure low probability & time saving flag is saved in a special figure game mode flag area. The flag indicating that there is a time reduction flag in the normal figure indicates that the time reduction fluctuation state (the time reduction state, the normal power support state) of the general figure change display game is set. The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and the time saving state (general power support state). Further, the game control device 100 saves the initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction fluctuation frequency area storing the time reduction fluctuation frequency.

  In the big hit end setting process 3, a special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the jackpot probability is high and the time saving state (in this case, the time reduction change of the special figure change display game is executed).

  When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number ends, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process related to the container 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (result of A3201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A3202 to A3216. After performing the special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 without performing the processing (A3217), the symbol change control processing related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3218). Then, a lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process ends. In this manner, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. Note that the special symbol change itself may be apparently continued on the special figure 1 display 51 by the symbol change control process.

[Special figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 88A and 88B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half procedures of the special figure 2 game process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in a big hit state (A3301). When the special figure 1 variable display game is not in the big hit state (the result of A3301 is “N”), a special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

  Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A3304). The special figure 2 game processing timer is clocked for the interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interruption processing by updating −1. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

  When the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game is in progress (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the process of step A3304 without performing the processes of steps A3302 and A3303.

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3305 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3323.

  When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 It is determined whether the number of repetitions is 0 (A3306). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is “N”), the repetition number of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by −1 (A3307), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated. The timer value for long fluctuation (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3308). As will be described later, if the special figure 2 variable display game has a long fluctuation and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), a timer for the fluctuation time cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3306-A3308 By repeating the count of the timer value for the long fluctuation by the number of repetitions by the processing of the above, a timer having a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared.

  The game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”) and that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3306 is “Y”). The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register (A3309). Further, a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed using the special figure 2 game processing number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number (A3311).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A3311, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game, sets the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and sets the effect. Or, the special figure 2 ordinary processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 changing processing is executed (A3312). The details of the special map 2 ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “1” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process, and the like. The process during special figure 2 fluctuation to be performed is executed (A3313). Details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot fanfare command according to the type of the jackpot if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, The special figure 2 displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit and setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval is executed (A3314).

  In the special figure 2 displaying process, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a hit symbol command corresponding to the big hit symbol is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as a production command, and the big hit fanfare. A command is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. Subsequently, a jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is set, and the jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Then, "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the processing during the fanfare / interval.

  Also, in the special figure 2 displaying process, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, a hit symbol command corresponding to the small hit symbol is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command, A small hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. Then, the process number is set to "7" in order to shift to the small hit fanfare processing, the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. I do.

  In the special figure 2 displaying process, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, “0” is set as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal processing. Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area.

  If the game processing number is “3” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of open times, and updates the information necessary for performing the special winning opening process. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “4” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the last round, and sets an ending command if the big hit round is the last round, A special winning opening process is performed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball process (A3316).

  When the game processing number is “5” in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, and a process of setting information necessary for performing a jackpot ending process. The remaining mouth ball processing is executed (A3317).

  When the game processing number is “6” in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 big hit end processing for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 ordinary processing ( A3318). Note that the special figure 2 big hit end processing is the same as the special figure 1 big hit end processing in which the processing for “special figure 1” is replaced with “special figure 2”.

  When the game processing number is “7” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets information necessary for performing the small hitting process. Is executed during the small hit fanfare (A3319). In the small hit fanfare middle processing, the processing number "8" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the special figure 2 game processing timer area as the opening time of the lower large winning opening. To save.

  When the game processing number is “8” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets a small hitting end command, sets information necessary for performing a small hitting remaining ball process, and the like. The hit processing is executed (A3320).

  When the game processing number is “9” in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs processing for setting an ending time, setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 small hit end processing, and the like. The remaining ball processing is executed (A3321).

  When the game processing number is “10” in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end processing for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 ordinary processing. (A3322). In the special figure 2 small hit end processing, in addition to setting the processing number to “0” in order to return to the special figure 2 normal processing, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the decoration special figure 1 restart command Is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. In the special figure 2 small hit ending process, the flags in the ordinary figure game mode flag area and the special figure game mode flag area are maintained, and the occurrence of the small hit does not change the probability state or the like.

  When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number ends, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2 display. The symbol variation control process related to the container 52 is executed (A3324), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 ordinary processing (A3210) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special map 1 ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 change display game can start changing (A3401). If the special figure 1 change display game is not possible to start the change (if the change start is not possible) (result of A3401 is "N"), the special figure 1 game processing number is set to the number "0" of the special figure 1 ordinary processing. (A3416), it saves in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3417). Here, from the end of the big hit change in the special figure 2 change display game (during the special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 2 big hit end processing), and from the special figure 2 change display game From the end of the small hit change (during the special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the small hit operation (special figure 2 small hit end processing), it is determined that the special figure 1 change display game cannot be started to change.

  When the special figure 1 change display game can start changing (the result of A3401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handing instruction has been notified (A3402). If the left-turn instruction notification command is already prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-turn instruction has been notified. If the left-handing instruction has been notified (the result of A3402 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A3406.

  If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified based on the left-handed instruction notification flag (result of A3402 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and performs the effect command setting process. Is executed (A3404), and a left-turn instruction notification flag indicating that the left-turn instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like is set (A3405).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (A3406). When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3406 is “Y”), the special figure 1 ordinary processing number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, until the reserved number of the special figure 1 becomes 1 or more, the normal processing of the special figure 1 is repeated.

  If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (the result of A3406 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the fluctuation start probability information corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the presence or absence of the time saving state. The command is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3408). Subsequently, special figure 1 change start processing for starting the special figure 1 change display game is executed (A3409). Thereafter, a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3411).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as a production command (A3412), and executes a production command setting process. (A3413). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining number-of-games command can grasp the number of times of time reduction fluctuation.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the information of the special figure 1 being changed in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that special figure 1 is changing, or (during special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, a special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing is executed to shift to the special figure 1 change processing (A3415). In the special figure 1 change processing transition setting processing, for example, the processing number “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

[Tokuzu 2 usual processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 ordinary processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special map 2 ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 change display game can start changing (A3501). If the special figure 2 change display game is not possible to start the change (if the change cannot be started) (result of A3501 is “N”), the special figure 2 game processing number is set to the special figure 2 ordinary processing number “0”. (A3518) The image data is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). Here, from the end of the big hit change of the special figure 1 change display game (during the special figure 1 display processing) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 1 big hit end processing), the special figure 2 change display game It is not possible to start.

  When the special figure 2 change display game can start changing (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of reservations is not 0 (result of A3502 is "N"), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the presence or absence of a time saving state is prepared as a production command. Then, the effect command setting process is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 change start process for starting the special figure 2 change display game is executed (A3505).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3506), and executes a production command setting process (A3506). A3507). Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as a production command (A3508), and executes a production command setting process. (A3509). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining number-of-games command can grasp the number of times of time reduction fluctuation.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets information of the special figure 2 being changed in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that special figure 2 is changing or (special figure 1 is changing + special figure 2 is changing) is set. Next, a special figure 2 change processing transition setting processing is executed to shift to the special figure 2 change processing (A3511). In the special figure 2 change processing transition setting processing, for example, the processing number “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area.

When the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (the result of A3502 is “Y”),
It is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (A3512). When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3512 is “Y”), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 change display game is being executed) (A3513). If the special map 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A3513 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3514). If the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (the result of A3514 is “N”), a customer waiting demonstration in progress flag is set (A3515).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes an effect command setting process (A3517). The effect control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demonstration command can execute a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. Thereafter, the number "0" of the special figure 2 ordinary processing is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). Thereby, the special figure 2 usual processing is repeated until the special figure 2 reservation number becomes one.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (the result of A3512 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. A special process number 2 normal process number “0” is set as the game process number (A3518), and saved in the special process 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3519). Also, when the special map 1 is changing (the result of A3513 is “Y”), or when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (the result of A3514 is “Y”), a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared. Instead, the number “0” of the special figure 2 ordinary processing is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), and the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM is saved (A3519).

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 change start processing (A3409) in the special figure 1 ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a). It should be noted that the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including sorting of a prefetch fluctuation pattern). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). Then, a fall lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot flag 1 for setting the jackpot flag 1 to determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit or not, and sets big hit flag 1 (A3605a). Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (A3606a) related to setting of one stop symbol (symbol information), special figure 1 information setting for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game The processing (A3607a) is executed.

  In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a), when the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, the time reduction determination data , The round number upper limit information and the special winning opening opening information are acquired and saved. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit, the missing stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Thereafter, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. The types of big hits corresponding to the big hit stop symbol number include, for example, 16R certain variable big hits, 2R certain variable big hits, and 16R normal big hits (100 time reductions).

  The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state (with or without time saving) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end processing and the special figure 2 big hit end processing. The round number upper limit information and the special winning opening opening information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the change pattern of the special figure 1 change display game is set (A3608a). ). Next, a special figure 1 change pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting a change pattern which is a change mode in the special figure 1 change display game, and a change start information setting process for setting information of start of change of the special figure 1 change display game (A3609a) A3610a) is executed. Then, a time reduction variation number update process for updating the time reduction variation number is executed (A3611a).

  In the special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to change the fluctuation pattern random number 1 loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special figure 1. A distribution process based on the second half is selected to prepare a second half variation selection table. Subsequently, using the second-half variation selection table, a distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1) of the special figure 1 is executed to acquire the second half variation number. Save in the second half variable number area. Also, a first half variation selection table corresponding to the table selection pointer calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number is prepared. Further, a distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 is executed to acquire the first half variation number and save it in the first variation number area.

  In the time reduction fluctuation count update processing, if the special figure low probability & time reduction flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area and the special figure time reduction is in progress (with special figure low probability and normal power support is available), the time is reduced. The number of fluctuations is updated by -1 (1 is subtracted). Note that the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the time reduction state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 100 times. Also, regardless of which of the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display game starts changing, the time reduction change number is updated by -1. Then, when the number of times of the time reduction change becomes 0, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area, and the universal figure time saving no flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area. If the number of shortening fluctuations does not become 0, nothing is performed.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the process number to shift to the special figure 1 changing process (A3612a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A3613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (A3614a), and a signal (ON data of the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal) relating to the start of change of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the in-flight flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A3616a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (A3617a), and the special figure 1 changing symbol number area is saved. Then, the initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighted symbol) is saved (A3618a), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (A3505) in the special figure 2 ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process.

  In the special figure 2 change start processing, the "big hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 change start processing (FIG. 91) is replaced with "big hit flag 2", and "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2". Since the same processing as the special figure 1 change start processing is performed, detailed description is omitted. Steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 change start processing correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 change start processing, respectively.

  In the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b), when the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, the time reduction. The judgment data, the round number upper limit information, and the winning opening opening information are acquired and saved. On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is a small hit, the stopped symbol pattern corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved. If the big hit flag 2 is a loss, the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. After that, an ornament special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed.

[Fall lottery process]
Next, details of the drop lottery process (A3604a, A3604b) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the drop lottery process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in the high probability state (probable change state), that is, whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A3701). When the special figure high probability is not in progress (result of A3701 is “N”), the falling lottery process ends.

  When the special figure high probability is present (the result of A3701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines that the value of the falling random number of the target (the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value. It is determined whether or not (A3702). If it is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is “Y”), the falling lottery process ends. If it is equal to or more than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is “Y”), the falling lottery process ends.

  When the value is equal to or less than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is “N”), the value of the target fall lottery random number becomes a value between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Therefore, the process at the time of the winning of the drop lottery is started, and first, a signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A3704). Here, the signals relating to the high probability termination are two big hits off data (off signal) and four big hits off data (off signal). As a result, a signal regarding the high-probability termination is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the high probability and the reduction of the working hours in the test signal output data area (A3705). The signal relating to the end of the high probability & shortening of time is, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and special symbol 2 fluctuation. This is the off data of the time reduction state signal.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the left-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A3708), and the falling lottery process ends. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the big hit probability is low and there is no time saving state (normal game state).

  As described above, in the probable change state (during special figure high probability), a fall lottery is executed at the start of each special figure change display game, and at the time of the win of the fall lottery, from the probable change state (high probability state) to the normal game state (low probable state). (A3704 to A3708).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 change start process will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Subsequently, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (A3802). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (A3803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3804). If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3804 is “N”), a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big hit random value (A3805). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3806). If the result of the determination is a big hit (result of A3806 is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3801 (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed. finish. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 can be avoided at the same time. .

  If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3804 is “Y”), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is “N”), the game control device 100 The flag 1 setting process ends.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the slip information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3901), and saves the slip information in the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3902). Subsequently, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM (for 1 reserved number) and prepared (A3903). Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest). After that, the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3905). If the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is “N”), a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big random number (A3906). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907). If the result of the determination is a big hit (result of A3907 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the outlier information was saved in step A3902 (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting processing is performed. finish. The big hit flag 2 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 can be prevented from becoming a big hit at the same time. .

  If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A3905 is “Y”), or if the determination result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is “N”), the game control device 100 acquires A small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit is executed based on the random number value of the big hit (A3909), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (A3909). A3910). In the present embodiment, the random number value of the big hit is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). When the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (result of A3910 is “Y”), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3901 (A3911), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. If the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (result of A3910 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing (A3805, A3906) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing, the big hit flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets an outlier (other than the big hit) as the determination result (A4007), and ends the big hit determination processing. I do.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability is present (A4003). If the special figure is in the high probability (the result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability set value is set (A4004). On the other hand, when the special figure is not in the high probability (result of A4003 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4005).

  When the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to be out (other than the big hit) (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “N”), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination processing (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting processing and the like will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the small hit determination process. Note that the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred.

  Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the above-described big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure change display game becoming a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination. However, a configuration in which a unique small hit random number is provided is also possible.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a loss as the determination result (A4103), and ends the small hit determination processing. .

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. Is determined (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is “Y”), a loss is set as the judgment result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is “N”), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
FIGS. 98 (a), (b) and (c) show the special figure change display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit determination processing (FIG. 96), small hit determination processing (FIG. 97), and fall lottery processing (FIG. 93). 3 is a table illustrating a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a falling probability of the game.

  In the example of FIG. 98A, the jackpot probability (high probability state) in the high probability state is the same regardless of the probability setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability (low-probability state) in the low-probability state tends to increase as the probability set value increases (becomes higher), and the larger the probability set value is, the more likely it is that a big hit occurs and the player This is advantageous. As described above, only one of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The big hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 96 by the range of the big hit random number. The jackpot probability can be changed in accordance with the probability set value by changing the range of the lower limit judgment value or the value of the jackpot random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value in accordance with the probability set value.

  Also, in setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, or setting 5 and setting 6, the big hit probability (high probability state) and the big hit probability (low probability state) are the same. Note that the jackpot probabilities may be different from each other in all settings. Further, even if the jackpot probability is the same, the effect control device 300 can execute an effect according to each probability setting value (variable effect setting process described later).

  In the example of FIG. 98 (b), the small hit probability is constant regardless of the high probability state or the low probability state, and regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit judgment value and the small hit lower limit judgment value in FIG. 97 by the range of the big hit random number. As shown in FIG. 87, in the special figure 1 variable display game, no small hit occurs (the small hit probability is zero). A configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game is also possible. In the low probability state, the small hit probability may be lower than in the high probability state.

  In the example of FIG. 98 (c), the falling probability as the winning probability of the falling lottery does not depend on the probability setting value (setting), regardless of whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state, and It is constant (1/237) regardless of whether the game is the one-variation display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. The falling probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the falling lottery upper limit determination value and the falling lottery lower limit determination value in FIG. 93 by the range of the value of the falling lottery random number.

[Special figure 1 information setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting processing (A3607a) in the special figure 1 change start processing will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a fluctuation pattern selection information table (A4401). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

  Here, the first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second half fluctuation. The first half variation is a variation mode before the start of the reach, and the second half variation is a variation mode after the reach state, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is “N”). ), The special figure 1 reservation number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value in order to sort the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 reservation number (A4404). Then, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4405.

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates and converts the first half offset data acquired in step A4402 without performing the process of step A4404. Instead, the flow shifts to the process of Step A4405.

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (the fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and stores the second half offset data (the fluctuation distribution information 2) in the RWM fluctuation distribution. The information is saved in the information 2 area (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 information setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting processing (A3607b) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in the low-probability state and is in a state without time saving (a state without ordinary power support), that is, in the special figure low probability & without time saving (normal game (A4501). If the special figure low probability & time saving is not being performed (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A4505.

  If the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (A4501 is "N"), that is, if the time saving state or the probable change state is in effect, the special figure change display game to be started from now on ends. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation (A4502). The time reduction final variation is the last (for example, the 100th) special figure variation display game in the time reduction state. If the special figure change display game to be started is the time-change final change (the result of A4502 is “Y”), the process shifts to the process of step A4506.

  When the special figure change display game to be started is not the time reduction final change (the result of A4502 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a change pattern selection information table (A4503). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. .

  On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure change display game to be started is the high probability final change. (A4505). Here, the high probability final change is a special figure change display game when the player falls from the certainty change state (high probability state) to the normal game state (low probability state) by winning the falling lottery (FIG. 93).

  The game control device 100 determines whether the special figure change display game to be started is a high-probability final change (the result of A4505 is “Y”) or a time-reduction final change (the result of A4502 is “Y”). )) In order to secure time for notifying that it is the final variation, the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final variation are set (A4506), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A4511.

  When the special figure change display game to be started is not the high probability final change (the result of A4505 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 change display game is a big hit ( A4507). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (result of A4507 is "N"), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4508), and the process of step A4510 Move to When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big figure of the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game has a long-time fluctuation (long fluctuation).

  In the probable change state (special figure high probability state), the special figure 2 change display game does not set the second half offset data for the long time change of the special figure 2 change display game. (Short variation compared to). As a result, in the probable change state (the special figure high probability state), a small hit rush (RUSH) state occurs in which the small hit frequently occurs in the special figure 2 change display game. Since the probability state does not change in the small hit, the small hit rush state in which the small hit occurs frequently continues from the start of the probability change state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure change display game becomes the big hit result). It is to be noted that a configuration that enables a small hit rush state even in a time saving state is possible.

  After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4511), and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2). ) Is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting processing ends.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, the details of the change start information setting processing (A3610a, A3610b) in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the change start information setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used (A5001).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (A5004), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is acquired (A5005).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value (A5006), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). Next, it is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5008). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A5008 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the long change (long time change) of the special figure 2 variable display game Is determined (A5009).

  When the long variation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not started (the result of A5009 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5010). When the long fluctuation of the two-variation display game is started (the result of A5009 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variable display game, the predetermined number of repetitions (here 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to the number of repetitions in order to cause the variation of the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) which is not enough with the 2-byte timer. Set to the area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt period of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds. The long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed in the normal gaming state.

  For example, when a timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of repetitions is saved nine times, the timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2 The timer is decremented in the game processing (FIG. 88) (A3304), and when the time is up (the result of A3305 is “Y”), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3307), and the long fluctuation timer is added to the game processing timer. The value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set again (A3308). As a result, the special figure 2 change display game with a long change can have a long change time of 60000 msec + (60000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

  The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case where the fluctuation is not long (the number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuation time saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

  When information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5012 without setting the number of times of repetition of the timer.

  After steps A5008, A5010, and A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a change command (MODE) corresponding to the first half change number (A5012), and prepares a change command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half change number (A5013). . Then, an effect command setting process for transmitting the fluctuation command as an effect command is executed (A5014).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and changes the special figure fluctuations of the target. The contents of the random number storage area relating to the display game are shifted (A5016), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5017). Then, the change start information setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. Fluctuating commands including information on patterns are given, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination number output number by +1 (A5301). The number of times of symbol determination output is used in a symbol determination frequency signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) for outputting a symbol determination frequency signal generated when a stop symbol of the special figure variation display game is determined to an external device. Is done. Next, the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared as an effect command (A5302), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 change display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 as a display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a symbol out of the special pattern 1 and 2000 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol of the special symbol 1.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 change display game is a loss (the result of A5307 is “Y”), the information saved in the above-described special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (the stop symbol number at the time of the loss) is the special figure 1 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322).

  When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is “N”), the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed). It is determined whether or not (A5308). If the special figure 2 is not fluctuating (the result of A5308 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A5319. If the special figure 2 is also fluctuating (the result of A5308 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the processing for displaying the special figure 2 described below is being executed (A5309).

  When the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the game control device 100 causes the process to proceed to step A5311. When the special figure 2 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5309 is “N”), the number of times of outputting the symbol determination times is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (A5311), and displayed in the game processing timer area of the special figure 2 Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of the timer interrupt processing. 4 msec is added because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3304), and thus is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special symbol 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 can be equalized. If the stop display of the special figure 2 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but may be shortened in some cases).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the design symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 as an effect command (A5313), saves it in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the effect command setting process (A5314). A5315). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5317). After that, a special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 for performing setting for executing the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process shift setting processing 2, processing for saving the processing number “2” in the special figure 2 game processing number area or stopping the special figure 2 variable display game with a loss result is executed.

  By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, in the special figure 1 changing display processing, which is the control related to the special figure 1 changing display game, the outlier of the special figure 2 changing display game (including the decoration special figure 2 changing display game) is set. The execution of the special figure 2 displaying process (end of the special figure 2 variable display game) is set. As described above, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (while the special figure 2 is changing), if the special figure 1 variable display game results in a hit (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is lost. As a result, the fluctuation is forcibly terminated (forcibly terminated).

  The special figure 1 changing process is performed when the variable time ends, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) times out (A3206). Since the result is executed in “Y”), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended (forced end).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit information is loaded from the aforementioned special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A5320). The winning opening information is loaded and saved in the winning opening information area (A5321). Thereafter, the information (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) saved in the above-described special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1 for setting to execute the special figure 1 display processing is executed (A5323), and the special figure 1 changing processing ends. In the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 1, the special figure 1 is displayed, such as saving the processing number “2” in the special figure 1 game processing number area or executing processing to stop the special figure 1 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to shift to the processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 forms the stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, even if the special control 2 variable display game is being executed (while the special control 2 is changing), the special control 2 variable display game is lost if the special control 1 variable display game results in a hit. A forced termination means for forcibly terminating the result is provided.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination number output number by +1 (A5401). The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in a symbol determination frequency signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs a symbol determination frequency signal generated when a stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to an external device. . Next, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared as an effect command (A5402), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5403). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 change display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 as a display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the off symbol of the special figure 2, 600 msec if it is the big hit symbol of the special figure 2, and 136 msec if it is the small hit symbol of the special figure 2. is there. In addition, the display time of the outlying symbol and the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same, but is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss (the result of A5407 is “Y”), the information saved in the above-described special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (the stop symbol number at the time of the loss) is the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not wrong (the result of A5407 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed). Is determined (A5408). If the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A5408 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A5423. If the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (the result of A5408 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 fluctuating display game is a big hit (A5409).

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5409 is “N”), that is, if it is a small hit, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 game interruption flag (A5412). Then, an ornament special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414). Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Step A5423. As described above, even when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (while the special figure 1 is changing), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special figure 1 game. The interruption of the measurement of the fluctuation time by the processing timer is interrupted. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 interrupted after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game ends. The variable display game can be restarted.

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a special figure 1 displaying process to be described later is being executed ( A5410). When the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5410 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of step A5415. When the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (result of A5410 is “N”), the number of times of output of the number of times of symbol determination is updated by +1 (A5411). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (A5415) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. The time is saved (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of the timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interruption period) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3205), and thus is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of the special figure 1 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but may be shortened in some cases).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares a design symbol command of the decorative special figure 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes an effect command setting process (A5418). A5419). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 change display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5421). Thereafter, a special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 for setting for executing the special figure 1 display processing is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display process shift setting processing 2, processing for saving the processing number “2” in the special figure 1 game processing number area or stopping the special figure 1 variable display game as a result of a loss is executed.

  By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, in the special figure 2 changing display processing, which is the control related to the special figure 2 changing display game, the outlier of the special figure 1 changing display game (including the decoration special figure 1 changing display game) is set. The execution of the special figure 1 displaying process (end of the special figure 1 variable display game) is set. As described above, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (while the special figure 1 is changing), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly generated with a loss result. (The execution ends).

  The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the time of the special figure 2 game processing timer expires (the results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in “Y”), the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (executed) when the special figure 2 variable display game resulting from the hit stops changing.

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). When the result of the special figure 2 change display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is “Y”), the information saved in the above-described special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (the stop symbol number at the time of the small hit) is the special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (a large hit) (result of A5424 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the aforementioned special figure 2 round number upper limit information area. The value information is loaded and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A5425),
The special winning opening information is loaded from the special drawing 2 special opening information area and saved in the special opening information area (A5426). Then, the information (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) saved in the above-described special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 for setting for executing the special figure 2 display processing is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 changing processing ends. In the special figure 2 display process shift setting processing 1, the special figure 2 is displayed, such as saving the processing number "2" in the special figure 2 game processing number area or executing processing to stop the special figure 2 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to shift to the processing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 forms the stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Even if the special control 1 variable display game is being executed (while the special control 1 is changing), the game control device 100 loses the special control 1 change display game if the special control 2 variable display game results in a hit. A forced termination means for forcibly terminating the result is provided.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 104A and FIG. 104B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special fluctuation winning devices 38 and 39 is 0 (A6001). If the remaining sphere counter is not 0 (result of A6001 is “N”), the processing during the fanfare / interval ends. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (result of A6001 is “Y”). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (the result of A6002 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A6010.

  In the case of the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a game ball has passed at the general-purpose starting gate 34 (A6003). If there is no passing of the game ball at the normal figure starting gate 34 (result of A6003 is "N"), the processing during the fanfare / interval is ended. In other words, the process does not shift to the process related to the big hit (the process of opening the special winning opening, etc.) until the game ball passes the general-purpose starting gate 34 after the right-handed start.

  The game control device 100 sets the information on the start of the big hit when the game ball has passed at the ordinary figure starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is “Y”), that is, when the right-handed start is started. Execute (A6004-A6009). First, a round number upper limit table is set (A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit information area is obtained from the round number upper limit value table, and the RWM round number upper limit value area is obtained. (A6005). In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds is 16R, 8R, 2R.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit value table, and saves it in the RWM round LED pointer area (A6006). In the present embodiment, since the big winning prize mouth is opened at the big hit, the upper winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (A6007), and the unauthorized monitoring outside flag is set in the RWM upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (A6008), and the ON output data of the in-operation of the accessory continuous operating device is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the round number area by +1 (A6010). Note that the round number in the round number area has been cleared to 0 in the fanfare / inter-interval processing shift setting processing, and thus has been set to 0 before the start of the current big hit operation. After that, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6011), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6012).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the special jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves it in the large hit processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the special winning opening is repeated during one round, 0 is set as an initial value, and in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once during one round, the initial value is set as an upper limit. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing are repeated, the initial value is not necessarily 0, but may be a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Next, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round for operating the lever solenoid 86b for opening the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6016). In the present embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is the big hit round 1 (the first big hit round).

  When it is the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017). Here, the specific area 86 is opened in a long time in the case of a probability change big hit (for example, 16R, 8R or 2R probability change hit), and in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal big hit (for example, 16R normal hit). , The operation data of the lever solenoid 86b is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to zero. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (result of A6016 is “N”), stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets “4” as the process number in order to shift to the special winning opening process (A6019), and determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A6019). A6020). If the special game 1 is a big hit of the variable display game (the result of A6020 is “Y”), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the special winning opening opening time is set in the special figure 1 game processing. The data is saved in the timer area (A6022). If the special figure 1 is not a big hit of the variable display game (the result of A6020 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the special winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is saved in the area (A6024).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (ON data of the special motor-operated accessory 1 operating signal) relating to the start of the opening of the big winning opening in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the big winning opening solenoid of the RWM. In the data area, the upper winning port solenoid valve 39b (large winning port solenoid 2) is turned on, the upper winning port ON data is saved (A6026), the large winning port count number is cleared (A6027), and processing during fanfare / interval is performed. To end.

  In the present embodiment, there is only a big hit that opens only the big win, but two types of big hits that open only the big win and a big hit that opens only the lower win may be provided, It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper winning prize port and the lower winning prize port.

[Control of production control device]
Hereinafter, the control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 using the effect control program will be described.

[Main processing (effect controller)]
First, details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by effect controller 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “B ****”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, effect controller 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, a command reception interruption process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, effect controller 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the power-on initial value is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

  Subsequently, effect controller 300 clears a WDT (watch dock timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B0002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Thereafter, effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from RTC (real-time clock) 338 as a clock unit (B0009).

  In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process proceeds to step B0009. In addition, the configuration may be such that the RTC reading process is executed only once when the power to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, when the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). And B0004). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined period or only once when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. Then, effect control device 300 may execute various processes using a time timer instead of RTC 338. By doing so, the number of times of reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 can be reduced.

  In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), a predetermined effect may be executed. By randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability according to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be selected so that the selection rate at a long time interval becomes smaller as the set value is larger. Further, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by performing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, a lottery may be selected so that the selection rate of a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the cross key 690f) of the effect button 25 by the player, or changes the effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Then, an effect button input process is performed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for receiving operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by a person in charge of a game arcade (game store) or a player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs an effect point control process of adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, the production points are added by performing a production or operation that is the target of production point addition, and at the end of a game, for example, at the end of a game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by randomly selecting a value (added value) to be added to the effect point with a probability according to the set value. For example, lottery may be performed so that the selectivity of a large addition value increases as the set value increases.

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes a received command received from game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41 or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. An effect display editing process is performed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the rendering preparation to the display frame buffer is completed, and the rendering command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 An instruction to draw a screen is issued (B0018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame switching is performed, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (１ ／ of the frame period). . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 second.

  Further, effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from speaker 19 (B0019).

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) including the LEDs (B0020). In the decoration control processing, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (a board effect device 44, a frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control processing, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

  Then, after finishing the process of B0021 described above, effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, the received command check processing (B0014) in the above-described main processing (FIG. 105) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by effect controller 300.

  The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as a command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the number of received commands is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and thus the received command check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to a command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, data is not overwritten.

  Then, effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read out in the order of the indexes and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if the copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N )), And repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, the analysis of the received command is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception.

  Subsequently, when the copying is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), effect control device 300 loads the received command content in the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the received command to analyze the content. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 107. Also, the address of the analysis command area is updated (B1109), and then the processing of step B1101 is performed. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in has been completed (B1110). If the analysis has not been completed (result of B1110 is “N”), the processing of steps B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing ends.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the above-described received command check processing (FIG. 106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by effect controller 300.

  First, effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command into a MODE part and the lower byte into an ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of the command. You. Therefore, the higher order and lower order of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether the value is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION section is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variation command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special decoration symbol, and includes a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process). If the MODE section indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the range of the hit command (B1207). Note that the hit command is a command for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to an effect during a hit. For example, a big hit fanfare command (set in the special figure display processing), a round command (fanfare / During interval processing), interval command (setting during special winning opening processing), ending command (setting during special winning opening processing), small hit fanfare command, small hit opening command (small round command), A small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) and the like. If the MODE section indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent a hit-related command (result of B1207 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol-related command (B1209). Note that the symbol-related commands include a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section indicates a symbol command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a symbolic command (result of B1209 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section falls within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE section indicates a one-shot command (the result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the range of the prefetching symbol command (B1213). . The look-ahead design related commands include a look-ahead stop design command. If the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol-related command (result of B1213 is “Y”), a pre-reading symbol-related command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analyzing process ends. In the pre-reading symbol command processing, if the latest received special decoration figure number command is the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is converted to the special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number. (1) When the decorative special figure holding number command saved in the first look-ahead symbol command area and received most recently is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command, the pre-reading symbol system command (prefetch stop design command) corresponds to the special figure 2 pending number. Special figure 2 Save in the look-ahead symbol command area. If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is low, the look-ahead symbol command processing is executed using the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability). If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is high, the look-ahead is performed. The pre-reading symbol command processing may be executed using a stop symbol command (low probability).

  If the MODE part does not represent the prefetching symbol command (the result of B1213 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the prefetch variable command (B1215). ). The prefetch variation command includes a prefetch variation pattern command. If the MODE section indicates the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch variable command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing ends. In the prefetch variation command processing, a prefetch lottery process related to a prefetch effect is executed based on a prefetch variation pattern command or a prefetch symbol command (prefetch stop symbol command). Examples of the look-ahead effects include a continuous notice effect (including a chance effect effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( The result of B1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a single command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot system command process ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (result of B1301 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE section indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is "Y"), a RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is performed (B1304), and a single-shot system command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is "N"), then effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a power failure restoration command (B1305). ). If the MODE section indicates a power failure recovery command (result of B1305 is “Y”), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the power failure restoration command (result of B1305 is "N"), then effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demonstration command (B1307). . If the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “Y”), a customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents the decorative special figure 1 reservation number command. (B1309). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 1 pending number command (result of B1309 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 pending number command. Is determined (B1311). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1312), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 pending number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE section indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command (step B1313). B1315). The error / illegal commands include, for example, an illegal occurrence command, an illegal release command, a status off command, and a status on command. As a state ON command, generation of a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and generation of a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame) Release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

  If the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or improper notification is executed (B1316). The one-shot command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), then the mode control unit 300 sets the mode switching command (processing during special figure display). Is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE section indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not indicate a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit indicates an out-ball number command indicating the number of out-balls. It is determined whether it is not (B1319). If the MODE section indicates the out-ball count command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball count reception process is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the number-of-out-balls command (result of B1319 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a count command (large winning opening count command). Is determined (B1321). Then, when the MODE section indicates the command of the special winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a count command (result of B1321 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure restoration in step A1046 of FIG. 82B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. If the MODE section indicates the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is executed (B1324), and the single command processing is terminated. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

  If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command (result of B1323 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). As a command of the setting change system, for example, there is a command (A1030) during the change of the probability setting. If the MODE section indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), a setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change information setting processing, the contents of the setting change type command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for changing the probability setting is received, in the setting change information setting process, a display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being changed.

  If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (result of B1325 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). . As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) during probability setting confirmation. If the MODE section indicates a setting confirmation type command (result of B1327 is “Y”), a setting confirmation type information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot type command processing ends. In the setting confirmation system information setting processing, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for confirming the probability setting is received, in the setting confirmation information setting process, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1329). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of the special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of the special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section command is a normal command ( B1330).

  When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (result of B1330 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets a stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game is performed after all symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single command processing ends. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state. However, depending on the timing at which the present process is executed, the game state flag is changed to the flag of “changed”, “big hit”, “small hit”. Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is "N"), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

  In addition, although not described in FIG. 108, when the MODE unit indicates the decoration special figure 1 suspension command (A5413) or the decoration special figure 1 resuming command (A7311), the effect control device 300 sets the decoration special figure 1 Processing for interrupting and resuming the variable display game may be executed. When the MODE section indicates information (such as a specific area passing command) indicating that there is a V winning, the effect control device 300 may report the V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

[Symbol command processing]
Next, details of the symbol command processing (B1210) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE portion and the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols in the special figures 1 and 2 changes, the symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is a missing symbol, a 16R probability variable big hit symbol, a 2R probability variable big hit symbol, a 16R normal big hit symbol, or the like.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by effect controller 300.

  The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends. If the special figure type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and the symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent is determined. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variable system command of a loss is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends.

  If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904), and determines the effect during the variation. A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous announcement effect (the remaining number of continuous announcement effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907).

(Variable effect setting processing)
Next, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation command process (FIG. 110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (the variation that does not enter the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (result of B2001 is “Y”), the first-half notice distribution corresponding to the number of production points, the model code, the special map type, the production mode, and the set value (probability set value) A group address table is set (B2002), and the address of the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of suspensions of the special figure type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without the reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of reservations increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

  If the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the variation pattern type is the variation with reach, the effect control device 300 determines the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the set value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are set. (B2005).

  After steps B2003 and B2005, effect control device 300 performs a lottery of a notice appearing during the first half change (before reach) (B2006). In addition, the lottery probability of the announcement depends on the set value. Subsequently, a second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, the symbol type, and the set value (probability set value) is set (B2007). The address of the second-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and a lottery of a notice that appears during the second-half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the lottery probability of the announcement depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the fluctuation command (the fluctuation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the fluctuation time and the main reach content can be known from the fluctuation command.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the contents of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for indicating the set value (probability set value, setting) is determined (B2012). Thereafter, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed in accordance with the content of the fluctuation effect such as the reach effect or the notice effect (B2013). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, a stray eye is determined in the case of a missing symbol.

  Next, effect control device 300 performs display setting of the setting suggestion effect (B2014). The display setting of the variable effect such as the reach effect is performed (B2015), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (B2016). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is performed. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read (B2017). Subsequently, a voice number that determines an effect mode (sound output mode) based on the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines an effect mode by light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decorating device (the board decorating device 46, the frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc., of each LED) determined by the decorative number. .

  In addition, it is possible not only to set the voice number and the decoration number based on the effect contents but also to set the lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decoration light emitting unit (LED).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure change corresponding to the special figure type (B2019), and a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) other than the first to third special symbols. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation is performed (B2020). The fourth symbol change is displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the lamp display device 80 and / or the display device 41 provided other than the display device 41.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
According to the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can be controlled as a so-called simultaneous fluctuating machine, and the special figure 1 fluctuating display game and the special figure 2 fluctuating display game can be simultaneously and independently (both) running. . Even if one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is running, if the other is a big hit, one variable display game can be forcibly ended with a loss result. In addition, in the probable change state, a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which many small hits occur in the special figure 2 variable display game can be realized. Further, game control and effect control according to the probability set value can be realized.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a plurality of embodiments can be combined. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (such as slot machines). The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 production button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning area (first start winning area)
37 Ordinary Fluctuation Winning Device 38 First Special Fluctuation Winning Device 39 Second Special Fluctuation Winning Device 40 Center Case 41 Display Device 44 Board Direction Device 46 Board Decoration Device 50 Collective Display Device (LED)
93 Setting key switch 100 Game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
400 Power supply unit 806 Large winning opening unit 808 General winning opening unit 812 RUSH lamp 815 Seal 817 Related information 819a Position information 819b Position information 820a Local object lamp 822 Virtual line 841 Sub board box 841
841a Internal space 842 Box lower member 843 Box upper member 858 Fastening screw 859 Cover member 906a Movable member

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine having a specific area into which a game ball can flow in a special game state generated when a result of a game becomes a special result,
A detection unit that can detect that a game ball has passed into an area that can flow in the special game state and is different from the specific area,
A movable member operable in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and disposed upstream of the specific area and the detection unit,
A game ball can flow into the specific area by the movable member operating in one of the left and right directions,
A game machine wherein a game ball can flow into the detection means by the movable member operating in the other direction in the left-right direction. A first inflow path for causing a game ball to flow into the specific area;
The movable member,
By operating in the one direction and being arranged outside the first inflow path, a game ball can flow into the specific area,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a game ball can flow into the detection means by operating in the other direction and being arranged in the first inflow path.